R-99-06-24-10C1 - 6/24/19991
1
1
1
1
,e qq -06 / / -sac
CITY OF ROUND ROCK
PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT
221 EAST MAIN STREET
ROUND ROCK TEXAS 78664
MESA PARK IMPROVEMENTS
1999 CDBG FUNDS
JUNE 1999
PREPARED BY:
Martinez, Wright & Mendez, Inc.
CAAL • ENVIRONMENTAL ENORIEERe4a SUMMING MCWIECIURE
Twin Towers Creekaide Moro
1106 Payton Ln., Suite 400w 900 Round Rock Ave. Suite 310
Austin, Texas 78723 . Round Rock. Tema 78881
(512) 453 -0767 Fax (512) 453 -1734 (512) 255 -1533 Fox (512) 255 -5301
r
Section
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Description Page
Notice to Bidders NB -1
Bid Documents BD -1
Post Bid Documents PBD -1
General Conditions GC -1
Special Conditions SC -1
Technical Specifications TS- 1
Plans, Details, and Notes PDN -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.0 NOTICE TO BIDDERS
Sealed bids addressed to the Purchasing Agent, City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street,
Round Rock, Texas 78664, for furnishing all labor, material and equipment and performing all work
required for the project titled Mesa Park Improvements (project includes a sidewalk, a park
pathway, and misc. park impovements) will be received until 2:00 Monday, June 21, 1999 then
publicly opened and read aloud at the City Hall Council Chambers at the same address. Bid
envelopes should state date and time of bid and "Mesa Park Improvements ". No bids may be
withdrawn after the scheduled opening time. Any bids received after scheduled bid opening time
will be retumed unopened.
Bids must be submitted on City of Round Rock bid forms and must be accompanied by an
acceptable bid security as outlined in the Instructions to Bidders, payable to the City of Round Rock,
Texas equal to five percent (5 %) of the total bid amount. Plans, Bid Forms, Specifications, and
Instructions to Bidders may be obtained from Martinez, Wright, and Mendez, Inc., 1106 Clayton Ln,
Suite 400w in Austin, Texas 78723 (512- 453 -0767) beginning Monday, June 7, 1999 for a non-
refundable charge of $25_00 per set.
In case of ambiguity, duplication, or obscurity in the bids, the City of Round Rock reserves
the right to construe the meaning thereof. The City of Round Rock further reserves the right to reject
any or all bids and waive any informalities and irregularities in the bids received.
The successful bidder will be expected to execute the standard contract prepared by the City
of Round Rock, and to furnish performance and payment bonds as described in the bid documents.
Contractors and subcontractors shall pay to laborers, workmen, and mechanics the prevailing wage
rates as determined by the City of Round Rock.
Publish Dates:
Austin American Statesman:
Monday, June 7,1999
Sunday, June 13,1999
NOTICE TO BIDDERS
noticebd/spec.master NB - 1
Round Rock Leader:
Monday, June 7, 1999
Monday, June 14, 1999
2.0 BID DOCUMENTS
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
1. Prior to submitting any proposal, bidders are required to read the plans, specifications,
proposal, contract and bond forms carefully; to inform themselves by their independent
research, test and investigation of the difficulties to be encountered and judge for themselves
of the accessibility of the work and all attending circumstances affecting the cost of doing
the work and the time required for its completion and obtain all information required to make
an intelligent proposal.
2. Should the bidder find discrepancies in, or omissions from the plans, specifications, or other
documents, or should he be in doubt as to their meaning, he should notify at once the
Engineer and obtain clarification or addendum prior to submitting any bid.
3. It shall be the responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received at the place and time
named in the Notice to Bidders. Bids received after closing time will be returned unopened.
4. Bids shall be submitted in sealed envelopes plainly marked "Sealed Bid" and showing the
name of the project, the job number if applicable, and the opening date and time.
5. Bids shall be submitted on proposal forms furnished by the City of Round Rock.
6. All proposals shall be accompanied by a certified cashier's check upon a National or State
bank in an amount not less than five percent (5 %) of the total maximum bid price, payable
without recourse to the City of Round Rock, or a bid bond in the same amount from a
reliable surety company, as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract and execute
performance and payment bonds, as stipulated by item 11 below, within ten (10) days after
notice of award of contract to him. Proposal guarantees must be submitted in the same sealed
envelope with the proposal. Proposals submitted without check or bid bonds will not be
considered.
7. All bid securities will be retumed to the respective bidders within twenty-five (25) days after
bids are opened, except those which the owner elects to hold until the successful bidder has
executed the contract. Thereafter, all remaining securities, including security of the
successful bidder, will be returned within sixty (60) days.
8. Until the award of the contract, the City of Round Rock reserves the right to reject any and
all proposals and to waive technicalities; to advertise for new proposals; or to do the work
otherwise when the best interest of the City of Round Rock will be thereby promoted.
9. In case of ambiguity or lack of clarity in the statement of prices in the bids, the City of Round
Rock reserves the right to consider the most favorable analysis thereof, or to reject the bid.
Unreasonable (or unbalanced) prices submitted in a bid may result in rejection of such bid
biddoc.mst/spec BD
or other bids.
10. Award of the contract, if awarded, will be made within sixty (60) days after opening of the
proposals, and no bidder may withdraw his proposal within said sixty (60) day period of time
unless a prior award is made.
11. Within ten (10) days after written notification of award of the contract, the successful bidder
must furnish a performance bond and a payment bond in the amount of one - hundred percent
(100 %) of the total contract price. If the total contract price is $25,000.00 or less, the
performance and payment bonds will not be required. Said performance bond and payment
bond shall be from an approved surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas,
with approval prior to bid opening, indicating it is authorized and admitted to write surety
bonds in this state. In the event the bond exceeds $100,000.00, the surety must also (1) hold
a certificate of authority from the United States secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety
on obligations permitted or required under federal law; or (2) have obtained reinsurance for
any liability in excess of $100,000.00 from a reinsurer that is authorized and admitted as a
reinsurer in this state and is the holder of a certificate of authority from the United States
secretary of the treasury to qualify as a surety or reinsurer on obligations permitted or
required under federal law.
In determining whether the surety or reinsurer holds a valid certificate of authority, the City
may rely on the list of companies holding certificates of authority as published in the Federal
Register covering the date on which the bond is to be executed.
12. If the total contract price is less than $25,000.00 the performance and payment bond
requirement will be waived by the City of Round Rock. Payment will be made following
completion of the work.
13. Failure to execute the construction contract within ten (10) days of written notification of
award or failure to furnish the performance bond, or letter of credit if applicable, and
payment bond as required by item 11 above, shall be just cause for the annulment of the
award. In case of the annulment of the award, the proposal guarantee shall become the
property of the City of Round Rock, not as a penalty, but as a liquidated damage.
14. No contract shall be binding upon the City of Round Rock until it has been signed by its
Mayor after having been duly authorized to do so by the City Council.
15. The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has furnished
certification of all insurance required and such has been approved by the City of Round
Rock, nor shall the contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his subcontract
until proof of all similar insurance that is required of the subcontractor has been furnished
and approved. The certificate of insurance form included in the contract documents
biddoc.mst/spec BD-2
must be used by the Contractor's insurer to furnish proof of insurance.
16. Any quantities given in any portion of the contract documents, including the plans, are
estimates only, and the actual amount of work required may differ somewhat from the
estimates. The basis for the payment shall be the actual amount of work done and/or
material furnished.
17. Bids shall be submitted on a separated contract basis. No Texas sales tax shall be included
in the prices bid for materials consumed or incorporated into the finished product under this
contract. This contract is issued by an organization which is qualified for exemption
pursuant to the provisions of Section 151.309(5) of the Texas Tax Code. The City of Round
Rock will issue an exemption certificate to the Contractor. The Contractor must then issue
a resale certificate to the material supplier for materials purchased. The Contractor must have
a valid sales tax permit in order to issue a resale certificate.
In obtaining consumable materials, the Contractor will issue a resale certificate in lieu of payment
of sales tax, and the following conditions shall be observed;
1) The contract will transfer title of consumable, but not incorporate, materials to the
City of Round Rock at the time and point of receipt by the Contractor;
2) The Contractor will be paid for these consumable materials by the City of Round
Rock as soon as practicable. Payment will not be made directly but considered
subsidiary to the pertinent bid item. The Contractor's monthly estimate will state that
the estimate includes consumables that were received during the month covered by
the estimate; and
3) The designated representative of the City of Round Rock must be notified as soon
as possible of the receipt of these materials so that an inspection can be made by the
representative. Where practical, the materials will be labeled as the property of the
City of Round Rock.
18. No conditional bids will be accepted.
19. If the bidder's insurance company is authorized, pursuant to its agreement with bidder, to
arrange for the replacement of a loss, rather than by making a cash payment directly to the
City of Round Rock, the insurance company must furnish or have furnished by bidder, a
performance bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(b), Texas Government Code, and
a payment bond in accordance with Section 2253.021(c).
biddoc.mst/spec BD-3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BID BOND
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT WE,
as PRINCIPAL and as SURETY, are
held and firmly bound unto the
hereinafter referred to as the "OWNER ", in the penal sum of five
percent (5 %) of the total amount of the bid of the PRINCIPAL submitted to the OWNER, for the
work described below; for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States of
America, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. In no case shall the liability
of the SURETY hereunder exceed the sum of $
The CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, THAT whereas, said PRINCIPAL has
submitted the above mentioned bid to the OWNER, for construction for the work under the
"SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF
for which bids
are to be opened at the office of the OWNER on
NOW THEREFORE, if the PRINCIPAL is awarded the contract, and within the time and manner
required under the heading "Instructions to Bidders ", after the prescribed forms are presented to him
for signature, enters into a written agreement, substantially in the form contained in the
Specifications, in accordance with the bid and files the two (2) bonds with the OWNER, one to
guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials, then this
obligation shall be null and void, otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect.
In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the OWNER and judgement is recovered, said
SURETY shall pay all costs incurred by the OWNER in such suit, including a reasonable attomey's
fee to be fixed by the Court.
In WITNESS WHEREOF, we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of
Principal: Surety:
By: By.
(Seal) (Seal)
biddoc.mstispec BD -4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
JOB NAME: Mesa Park Improvements
JOB LOCATION: Round Rock, Williamson County, Texas
OWNER:
DATE:
Gentlemen:
City of Round Rock, Texas
6/21/99
Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders, the undersigned bidder hereby
proposes to do all the work, to furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials,
insurance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the work on which he bids as provided by the attached
supplemental specifications, and as shown on the plans for the construction of MESA PARK IMPROVEMENTS
and binds himself on acceptance of this proposal to execute a contract and bond for completing said project within
the time stated, for the following prices, to wit:
Bid Item Description Unit
Item Quantity Unit and Written Unit Price Price
104G 250 S.F. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete
biddoc.mstlSpee
for
t3;x
and zero
PROPOSAL BIDDING SHEET
340 -B 2200 L.F. HMAC, Flexible Base & two Ribbon
Curbs
for 1\
dollars
and' r1r SAX cents $. sate $ 1q,gq`�
375 -2 120 S.F. Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramp
(including 4" flexible base)
for V- .:og`
dollars
and - Chir} .� `Mr €.p_ cents $
BASE BID
Amount
dollars
cents $>ro $ 1,5D0
$ t Lo
Bid Item Description and
Item Quantity Unit Written Total Unit Price
432 -4 6800 S.F. 4" Concrete Sidewalk
for 1ti -e2e-
dollars
and 7,¢r7 cents $ 3
604A 1500 S.Y. Seeding for Erosion Control method B
Fiber Mulch
for (t\
and Zero
610 400 L.F. Preservation of Trees and other Vegetation
for — CWO
and
628 20 L.F. Sediment Containment Dike
for 1r
dollars
and .€(0 cents $ 50
642 2700 L.F. Silt Fence for Erosion Control
for cx\E
and ri,rAr.,
biddoc.mst/spec BD -6
Unit
Price
Amount
$ o0
dollars
cents $ M $ 500
dollars
cents $ 0.50 $ o0
$ I,o00 "°
dollars
cents $ 1.30 $ 3, B I O -66
Bid Item Description and
Item Quantity Unit Written Total Unit Price
803 1 LS. Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
for FNS . `T1^%o .rldt
2800 1 L.S. Irrigation (Complete in place)
dollars
and ze(O cents $ 51(13 $ 5.1b00'
for ci -ek eev\ i hOU �
dollars
and Z2r0 cents $ 15,033 $ 15, 000
2900 1 L.S. Landscape (Complete in place)
for -FiOrQ �\ c cky\ \
and zero
2995 1 L.S.. Playground, Equipment & Surfacing
TOTAL BASE BID (Items 1 thru 12 ):
for Tay!
- ThooSarrNA
STATEMENT OF SEPARATE CHARGES:
biddoc.mst/spec BD
Unit
Price
dollars
cents $ 1 5,000 $ 15
Amount
dollars
and zero cents $1O,pcC) $ 1O, 000" bT3
Materials:
All Other Charges:
Total:
$ 11_00 I go coo
$ "0,066
$ 90, cid 120
$ I I_o Q, Qt)1 . l2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
If this proposal is accepted, the undersigned agrees to execute the contract and provide necessary bonds and
insurance certification as per the Instructions to Bidders and commence work within ten (10) days after written
Notice to Proceed. The undersigned further agrees to complete the work in full within ninety (90) calendar days
after the date of the written Notice -to- Proceed.
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in the proposal have been carefully checked and are submitted
as correct and final. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and may waive any informalities.
spectfully Submitted,
S uture
Print Name
pre
Title for
�if�1A�2Y�2�A1 th0[B enC
Name of Firm
t o �al�gq
Dat
biddoc.mst/spec BD-8
X315 fDvw:\e.
Address
51D-- a8 .- -%4
Telephone
Secretary, if Contractor is a
Corporation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.0 POST BID DOCUMENTS
11
11
11
I
•
1
1
1
1
1
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON §
AGREEMENT
28 July
THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this day of Jnl
1999, by and between (Owner) City of Round Rock, Texas of the State of Texas, acting through
Robert A. Stlu, Jr. May thereunto duly authorized so to do, hereinafter termed OWNER, and
uarcia Gene contractors Inc. Austin
(Contractor) of , Texas, County of
Travis , and State of Texas, hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR.
WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter
mentioned, to be made and performed by OWNER, and under the conditions expressed in the bond
bearing even date herewith, CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with the said OWNER to commence and
complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows:
mesa Park Improvements
Further described as the work covered by this specification consists of furnishing all the materials,
supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, supervision, labor, insurance, and other accessories and
services necessary to complete the said construction, in accordance with the conditions and prices
stated in the Proposal attached hereof, and in accordance with the Notice to Contractors, Instructions
to Bidders, General Conditions of Agreement, Special Conditions, Technical Specifications, Plans,
and other drawings and printed or written explanatory material thereof, and the Specifications and
Addenda therefor, as prepared by
14Im suns Ws ig d, ht
herein entitled
the ENGINEER, each of which has been identified by the CONTRACTOR'S written Proposal, the
General Conditions of the Agreement, and the Performance, Payment, and Maintenance Bonds
hereof, and collectively evidence and constitute the entire contract.
10 days
The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within calendar days after
th$ written notice to do so have been given to him, and to complete the same within
calendar days after the date of the written Notice to Proceed, subject to such
extensions of time as are provided by the General and Special Conditions.
The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds the price or prices shown in the
Proposal, which forms a part of this Contract, such payments to be subject to the General and Special
Conditions of the Contract.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this Agreement in the year
postbid.m3Hapec master
PBD -1
1
11
11
11
11
11
•
iP
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
and day first above written.
CITY OF ROUND ROCK. TEXAS Q.-Nate-6Q 'Gevver ckk ,C�O'C
(CONTRACTOR)
(OWNER)
ATTEST:
Corporate Seal
postbid.mst/spec master
BY:
E& k
tSuczn Gorc:rq its Qrestae.Wr
(Typed name) (Title)
ATTEST:
Secretary, if Contractor is a
Corporation or otherwise registered
with the Secretary of State
(The following to be executed if the Contractor is a Corporation.)
I, ie1Z Gtarct , certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as
Contractor herein; that J,o+r‘ C *-eJ Q , who signed this Contract on behalf of the
Contractor was then Pre,2,ider. v (official title) of said Corporation, that said Contract
was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation, that said Corporation by authority of its
governing body, and is within the scope of its corporate powers.
Signed:
PBD -2
Pent 11:1
'
11
11
11
11
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF
EACH ACCIDENT $
DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEES
SPECIAL ITEMS/EXCEPTIONS
The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and
Employers' Liability. Should any of the above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date
thereof, the issuing company will mail thirty (30) days written notice to the certificate holder named below.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of Round Rock SIGNATURE OF AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE
221 E. Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
attn: Joanne Land
BOND NUMBER AE 6135915
Typed Name:
Title:
WARRANTY BOND
AMOUNT 160,901.60
KNOW ALL MEN BY 1'HESE PRESENTS,
That we, Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
(hereinafter called the "Principal ") as Principal, and the
Gulf Insurance Company a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of
Missouri and duly licensed to transact business in the State of
Texas (hereinafter called the "Surety "), as Surety, are held and firmly bound
unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK. TEXAS (hereinafter called the* "Obligee"), in the sum of
One Hundred Sixty Thousand Nine Hundred One and .60 dollars
(5 160,901.60 ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said
Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by these presents.
postbidanstispec master,
PBD -8
1
11
11
11
11
I'
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Sealed with our seals and dated this
ninety nine
WHEREAS, the said Principal has heretofore entered into a contract with
The City of Round Rock, TX Dated
July 28 , 19 99 , for construction of:
postbid.msthpee master
Mesa Park Improvements
28th day of July , A.D. nineteen hundred and
WHEREAS, the said Principal is required to guarantee the construction of all improvements installed
under said contract, against defects in materials or workmanship, which may develop during the
period of one year(s) from the date of acceptance of the project above described, by
Owner:
The City of Round Rock, Texas
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THE OBLIGATIONS IS SUCH, that if said
Principal shall faithfully carry out and perform the said guarantee, and shall, on due notice, repair
and make good at its own expense any and all defects in materials or workmanship in the said work
which may develop during the period of one year(s) from the date of acceptance of the
project above described, by Owner:
The City of Round Rock, Texas
PBD -9
11
11
11
11
1'
I'
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
WARRANTY BOND (continued)
OR shall pay over, make good and reimburse to the said Obligee all Toss and damage which said
Obligee may sustain by reason of failure or default of said Principal so to do, then this obligation
shall be null and void; otherwise shall remain in full force and effect.
Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
Principal
By: �rw,
Pre 51kem
Title
3315 Blumie St.
Address
Austin, TX 78745
Resident Agent of Surety:
Kenneth L. Meyer
Printed Name
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
Cypress, TX 77429
City, State & Zip Code
k g14- A
Signature
po,tbid.msuspec marter
By: er
Kenneth L. Meyer
Title
PBD -10
Gulf Tnsnranrs Cmmpany
Surety
Attorney -in -Fact
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
Cypress, TX 77429
DUPLICATE
ORIGINAL
1
1
11
11
11
11
11
•
1
1
1
1
Jul 30 99 12:Sep John Garcia S12- 282 -2649 p.2
CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE Date: 7/30/99
PRODUCER COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE
AIC -SUN BELT GROUP, INC. A TRINITY UNIVERSAL INSURANCE CO.
6101 BALCONES DRIVE, No. 200
AUSTIN, TX 78731 B Consumers County Mutual Ins. Co.
INSURED C PAULA INSURANCE CO.
GARCIA GENERAL CONSTRUCTION, INC.
3315 BLUMIE STREET: AUSTIN, TX 78745
D
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT the Insured named above is insured by the Companies listed above with respect to the
business operations hereinafter described, for the types of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the
standard policies used by the companies, and further hereinafter described. Exceptions to the policies are noted below.
CO TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY EFFECTIVE EXPIRATION
LTR NUMBER DATE DATE
A $
B $
A
GENERAL LIABILITY
AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT
EXCESS LIABILITY
STATUTORY LIMITS
pmtid..,t/ pes masbr
TH 002571
C WORKERS' COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY
PWC 420 -1426 09/01/98 09/01/99
PBD -7
LIMITS
GENERAL AGGREGATE
TXP 6789784 12/24/98 12/24/99 $2,000,000
PRODUCTS- - / AGG. $
PERSONAL & ADV. INJURY $
EACH OCCURRENCE $
$1,000,000
FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $
MED. EXPEN MS FAny one person) $
$ 5,000
06/08/99 06/08/00 $1,000,010
BODILY INJURY (Per person) $
BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $
PROPERTY DAMAGE $
EACH $
UO 671 - 4850 12/24/98 12/ 24 /99kGGREGATE
$1,000,000 E
1
1
11
11
11
I'
iI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Jul 30 99 12:58p John Garcia
OTHER
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICLES /SPECIAL ITEMS/EXCEPTIONS
The City of Round Rock is named as additional insured with respect to all policies except Workers' Compensation and
Employers' Liability. Should any of the above described policies by cancelled or changed before the expiration date
thereof, the issuing company will mail thirty (30) days written notice to the certificate holder maned below.
CERTIFICATE HOLDER: City of Round Rock
REPRESENTATIVE
221 E. Main Street
Round Rock, Texas 78664
piatblimaNapec mot
attn: Joanne Land
Title: President
WARRANTY BOND
BOND NUMBER AMOUNT
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,
That we,
(hereinafter called the "Principal ") as Principal, and the
a Corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of
and duly licensed to transact business in the State of
(hereinafter called the "Surety "), as Surety, are held and firmly bound
unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS (hereinafter called the "Obligee "), in the sum of
dollars
($ ) for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we, the said
Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and
assigns, jointly and severally, firmly, by these presents.
PBD -8
512 -2B2 -2649
EACH ACCIDENT $
DISSE 9 P$LICY LIMIT $
500,000
DISEASE - EACH EMPLOYEE$
$100,000
P. 3
Typed Billy J. Lansford Name:
PERFORMANCE BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the term of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications,
or drawings accompanying the same, shall in anywise affect its obligation on this bond, and it does
hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the
contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this instrument this
28th day of July , 19 99
Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
Principal Surety
By:
Title
3315 Blumie St.
Address
Austin, TX 78745
Resident Agent of Surety:
Kenneth L. Meyer
Printed Name
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
Cypress, TX 77429
City, State & Zip Code
Signature
postbid.mstispec master
By: /(_uz- - n�
Kenneth L. Meyer
PBD -4
Gulf Insurance Company
Attorney -in -Fact
Title
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
Cypress, TX 77429
DUPLICATE
OPIGINAL
11
11
I
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
•
0
1
1
1
1
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON
PERFORMANCE BOND
Bond No: AE 6135915
Garcia General
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Contractors, Inc. of the City of
Austin , County of Travis , and State of Texas , as
Principal, and MI; ^ surance authorized under the law of the State of Texas to act as surety
on bonds for principals, are held and firm bo IId unto, CI7 OF ROUND ROCK TEXAS,
(Owner), in the penal sum of Ni ne o .60 n * * * * * * * ** dollars ($
160.901.60 ) for the payment whereof, well and truly to be made the said Principal and
Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and
severally, by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner dated the
28th d o f July , 19 to which the contract is
hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein
consisting of:
Mesa Park Improvements
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said
Principal shall faithfully perform said Contract and shall, in all respects, duly and faithfully observe
and perform all and singular the covenants, conditions and agreements in and by said Contract,
agreed and covenanted by the Principal to be observed and performed, including but not limited to,
the repair of any and all defects in said work occasioned by and resulting from defects in materials
furnished by or workmanship of, the Principal in performing the work covered by said Contract and
occurring within a period of twelve (12) months from the date of the contract Completion Certificate
and all other covenants and conditions, according to the true intent and meaning of said Contract and
the Plans and Specifications hereto annexed, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain
in full force and effect;
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253,
Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at Length
herein.
postbid.mWspec muter
PBD -3
THE STATE OF TEXAS
COUNTY OF WILLIAMSON
PAYMENT BOND
Bond No: AE 6135915
Garcia General
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Contractors, Inc. , of the City of
Austin County of Travis , and State of Texas as
Principal, and Co van suranc iuthorized under the laws of the State of Texas to act as Surety on
Bonds for Principals, are held and firmly bound unto THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, (OWNER),
and all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics and suppliers as their interest may appear, all
of whom shall have the right to sue upon this bond, in the penal sum of
One Hundred Sixty Thousand Nine Hundred One and .60 * * * * * * ** Dollars ($
160,901.60 ) for the payment whereof, well and truly be made the said
Principal and Surety bind themselves and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors, and
assigns, jointly and severally, by these presents:
WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Owner, dated the
28th day of July , 19 99, to which Contract is hereby
referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein
consisting of:
Mesa Park Improvements
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said
Principal shall well and truly pay all subcontractors, workers, laborers, mechanics, and suppliers,
all monies to them owing by said Principals for subcontracts, work, labor, equipment, supplies and
materials done and furnished for the construction of the improvements of said Contract, then this
obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise to remain in hull force and effect.
PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 2253,
Texas Government code, as amended, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in
accordance with the provisions of said Chapter 2253 to the same extent as if it were copied at length
herein.
pnstbid.mstIspec master
PBD -5
1
1
1
11
11
f1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PAYMENT BOND (continued)
Surety, for value received, stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or
addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work performed thereunder, or the plans, specifications
or drawings accompanying the same shall in anywise affect it's obligation on this bond, and it does
hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the
contract, or to the work to be performed thereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal and Surety have signed and sealed this Instrument this
28th day of July ,19 99
Garcia General Contractors, Inc. Gulf Insurance Company
Princi al Surety
By: *A By:
Kenneth L. Meyer
`-C(g th. NIN V
Title
3315 Blumie St.
Address
Austin, TX 78745 Cypress, TX 77429
Resident Agent of Surety:
Kenneth L. Meyer
Printed Name
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
Cypress, TX 77429
City, State & Zip Code
Signature
postbid.mst/spec master
PBD -6
Attorney -in -Fact
Title
13823 Schmidt Rd.
Address
D UPLICATE
cOG1 AL
NAME, AUUHESS
PRINCIPAL: CITY, STATE, ZIP
Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
3315 Blumie St.
Austin, TX 78745
EFFECTIVE DATE
July 28, 1999
CONTRACT AMOUNT
$ 160,901.60
GULF INSURANCE COMPANY
, gaM ST- LOUIS, MISSOURI
POWER OF ATTORNEY
ORIGINALS OF THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY ARE PRINTED ON BLUE
SAFETY PAPER WITH TEAL INK. DUPLICATES SHALL HAVE THE
SAME FORCE AND EFFECT AS AN ORIGINAL ONLY WHEN ISSUED IN
CONJUNCTION WITH THE ORIGINAL.
KNOWN ALL - MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the Gulf Insurance Com-
pany, a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Missouri, having
its principal office in the city of Irving. Texas, pursuant 10 the following resolution,
adopted by the Finance & Executive Committee of the Board of Directors of the said
Company on the 10th day of August, 1993, to wit:
"RESOLVED. that the President, Executive Vice President or any Senior Vice
President of the Company shall have authority to make, execute and deliver a Power
of Attorney constituting as Attorney -in -Fact. such persons. firms, or corporations as
may be selected From time to time; and any such Attorney -in -Fact may be removed
and the authority zranted him revoked by the President, or v Executive Vice
I President, or any Senior Vice President. or by the Board of Directors or by the
'Finance and Executive Committee of the Board of Directors.
RESOLVED, that nothing in this Power of Attorney shall be construed as a grant
of authority to the attorney(s) -in -tact to sign. execute. acknowledge. deliver or oth-
erwise issue a policy or policies a insurance on behalf of Gulf Insurance Company.
RESOLVED, that the signature of the President. Executive Vice President or
I y S Vice Prn, and the Seal o my e ffxed such
Power ni of r Attorney or eside any t ceruticate relating C thereto mpany by a fac ile. and to any any such
powers so executed and certified by facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall he
valid and binding upon the Company in the future with respect to any bond and
d rrents ang to bo w te coe"
Gulf cu insurancrele C ompany such does hereby nds to make hey - const and
d appmn[
1
1
II STATE OF NEW YORK
COUNTY OF KINGS
SS
Signed and Sealed at the City of New York.
■ DUP LIC A TE
■ ORIGINAL
1
8016 -AE
160,901.60
Kenneth L. Meyer of Cypress, TX
BOND 6135915
NUMBER AE
its true and lawful attorney(s)-in-fact, with full power and authority hereby conferred in its name. place and .stead. to sign, execute. acknowledge and deliver in its
ill behalf, as surety. any and all bonds and undertakings of suretyship, and ro hind Gulf Insurance Company thereby as fully and to the same extent as if any bonds. under-
takings and documents relating to such bonds and/or undercdtines were .signed by the duly authorized officer of the Gulf Insurance Compaq and all the acts of said
attomey(s}in-fact. pursuant to the authority herein given. are hereby ratified and confirmed.
The obligation of the Company shall not exceed one million (1,000.000) dollars.
III IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Gulf Insurance Company has caused these presents to he signed by any officer of the Company and its Corporate Seal to
he hereto affixed.
GULF INSURANCE COMPANY
4p
Christopher E. Watson
President
• On the 1st day of June. 1996 A.D., before me came Christopher E. Watson, known to me personally who being by me duly sworn, did depose and say;
that he resides in the County of Westchester. State of New York; that he is the President of the Gulf Insurance Company, the corporation described in and
which executed the above instrument that he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to the said instruments is such corporate seal; that
it was 00 affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation and that he signed his name. thereto by like order.
Dated the 28th
BOND AMOUNT
SPIRO K. BANTIS
Notary Public, State of New York
No. 24- 4861345
Qualified in Kings
Commission Expires May 12. 2000
USTATE OF NEW YORK )
1 SS
COUNTY OF NEW YORK )
I, the undersigned, Executive Vice President of the Gulf Insurance Company. a Missouri Corporation. DO HEREBY CERTIFY that the foregoing and
attached POWER OF ATTORNEY remains in full force.
day of July
Lawrence P. Miniter
Executive Vice President
. 19 99
4.0 GENERAL CONDITIONS
1
1
Contents
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1. Definition of Terms
1.01 - Owner, Contractor and Engineer
1.02 - Contract Documents
1.03 - Subcontractor
1.04 - Sub - Subcontractor
1.05 - Written Notice
1.06 - Work
1.07 - Extra Work
1.08 - Working Day
1.09 - Calendar Day
1.10 - Substantially Completed
gencond.mst/spec master
2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor
2.01 - Owner- Engineer Relationship
2.02 - Professional Inspection by Engineer
2.03 - Payments for Work
2.04 - Initial Determinations
2.05 - Objections
2.06 - Lines and Grades
2.07 - Contractor's Duty and Superintendence
2.08 - Contractor's Understanding
2.09 - Character of Workers
2.10 - Contractor's Buildings
2.11 - Sanitation
2.12 - Shop Drawings
2.13 - Preliminary Approval
2.14 - Defects and Their Remedies
2.15 - Changes and Alterations
2.16 - Inspectors
General Conditions of Agreement
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities
3.01 - Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible
3.02 - Ownership of Drawings
3.03 - Adequacy of Design
3.04 - Right of Entry
GC -1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities (cont'd)
3.05 - Collateral Contracts
3.06 - Discrepancies and Omissions
3.07 - Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant
3.08 - Damages
3.09 - Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public
3.10 - Performance and Payment Bonds
3.11 - Losses from Natural Causes
3.12 - Protection of Adjoining Property
3.13 - Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, etc.
3.14 - Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention
3.15 - Laws and Ordinances
3.16 - Assignment and Subletting
3.17 - Indemnification
3.18 - Insurance
3.19 - Final Clean-Up
3.20 - Guarantee Against Defective Work
3.21 - Testing of Materials
3.22 - Wage Rates
4. Prosecution and Progress
4.01 - Time and Order of Completion
4.02 - Extension of Time
4.03 - Hindrances and Delays
5. Measurement and Payment
5.01 - Quantities and Measurements
5.02 - Estimated Quantities
5.03 - Price of Work
5.04 - Partial Payments
5.05 - Use of Completed Portions
5.06 - Final Completion and Acceptance
5.07 - Final Payment
5.08 - Payments Withheld
5.09 - Delayed Payments
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6. Extra Work and Claims
6.01 - Change Orders
6.02 - Minor Changes
6.03 - Extra Work
6.04 - Time of Filing Claims
6.05 - Continuing Performance
7. Abandonment of Contract
7.01 - Abandonment by Contractor
7.02 - Abandonment by Owner
8. Subcontractors
8.01 - Award of Subcontracts for Portions of Work
8.02 - Subcontractual Relations
8.03 - Payments to Subcontractors
9. Separate Contracts
9.01 - Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts
9.02 - Mutual Responsibility of Contractors
9.03 - Cutting and Patching Under Separate Contracts
10. Protection of Persons and Property
10.01 - Safety Precautions and Programs
10.02 - Safety of Persons and Property
10.03 - Location and Protection of Utilities
gencond.mstispec master GC -3
1. Definition of Terms
1.01 Owner, Contractor and Engineer
The Owner, the Contractor and the Engineer and those persons or organizations identified
as such in the Agreement are referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular
in number and masculine in gender. The term "Engineer" means the Engineer or his duly
authorized representative. The Engineer shall be understood to be the Engineer of the
Owner, and nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual or
agency relationship between the Engineer and the Contractor.
1.02 Contract Documents
General Conditions of Agreement
The Contract Documents shall consist of the Notice to Contractors, Instructions to Bidders,
Proposal, Signed Agreement, Performance and Payment Bonds (when required), Special
Bonds (when required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Construction Specifications,
Plans and all modifications thereof incorporated in any such documents before the execution
of the agreement.
The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as
binding as if called for by all. In case of conflict between any of the Contract Documents,
priority of interpretation shall be in the following order: Signed Agreement, Performance and
Payment Bonds, Special Bonds (if any), Proposal, Special Conditions of Agreement, Notice
to Contractors, Technical Specifications, Plans, and General Conditions of Agreement.
1.03 Subcontractor
The term "Subcontractor," as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract
with the Contractor. It includes one who furnishes material worked to special design
according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not include one who merely
furnishes material not so worked.
1.04 Sub - Subcontractor
The term "Sub- Subcontractor" means one who has a direct or indirect contract with a
Subcontractor to perform any of the work at the site. It includes one who furnishes material
worked to a special design according to the plans or specifications of this work, but does not
include one who merely furnishes material not so worked.
gencond.mst/spec master GC -4
1.05 Written Notice
1.06 Work
Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the
individual or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered to or sent
by registered mail to the last business address known to him who gives the notice.
The Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, machinery, equipment, tools,
superintendence, labor, services, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation
and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the
Contract Documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both
workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required,
furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work
described in words which, when so applied, have a well -known technical or trade meaning
shall be held to refer to such recognized standards.
1.07 Extra Work
The tenn "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be
required by the Engineer or the Owner to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any
change, alteration or addition to the work shown upon the plans, or reasonably implied by
the specifications, and not covered by the Contractor's Proposal, except as provided under
"Changes and Alterations" herein.
1.08 Working Day
The term "Working Day" is defined as any day not including Saturdays, Sundays or any legal
holidays, in which weather or other conditions, not under the control of the Contractor, will
permit construction of the principal units of the work for a period of not less than seven (7)
hours between 7:00 a.m. and 6:00 p.m.
1.09 Calendar Day
The term "Calendar Day" is defined as any day of the week or month, no days being
excepted.
1.10 Substantially Completed
The tenn "Substantially Completed" shall be understood to mean that the structure has been
made suitable for use or occupancy or that the facility is in condition to serve its intended
purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment.
gencond.mstispec master
GC -5
2. Responsibilities of the Engineer and the Contractor
2.01 Owner - Engineer Relationship
The Engineer will be the Owner's representative during construction. The duties,
responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Engineer as the Owner's representative
during construction are as set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended or
limited without written consent of the Owner and the Engineer. The Engineer will advise
and consult with the Owner, and all of the Owner's instructions to the Contractor shall be
issued through the Engineer.
2.02 Professional Inspection by Engineer
The Engineer shall make periodic visits to the site to familiarize himself with the progress
of the executed work and to determine if such work meets the essential performance and
design features and the technical and functional engineering requirements of the Contract
Documents; provided and except, however, that the Engineer shall not be responsible for
making any detailed, exhaustive, comprehensive or continuous on -site inspection of the
quality or quantity of the work or be responsible, directly or indirectly, for the construction
means, methods, techniques, sequences, quality, procedures, programs, safety precautions
or lack of same incident thereto or in connection therewith. Notwithstanding any other
provision of this agreement or any other Contract Document, the Engineer shall not be
responsible or liable for any acts, errors, omissions or negligence of the Contractor, any
Subcontractor or any of the Contractor's or Subcontractor's agents, servants or employees or
any other person, firm or corporation performing or attempting to perform any of the work.
2.03 Payments for Work
The Engineer shall review the Contractor's applications for payment and supporting data,
determine the amount owed to the Contractor and recommend, in writing, payment to the
Contractor in such amounts; such recommendation of payment to the Contractor constitutes
a representation to the Owner of the Engineer's professional judgement that the work has
progressed to the point indicated to the best of his knowledge, information and belief, but
such recommendation of an application for payment to the Contractor shall not be deemed
as a representation by the Engineer that the Engineer has made any examination to determine
how or for what purpose the Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the contract
price.
2.04 Initial Determinations
The Engineer initially shall determine all claims, disputes and other matters in question
between the Contractor and the Owner relating to execution or progress of the work or
interpretation of the Contract Documents. The Engineer's decision shall be rendered in
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
writing within a reasonable time, which shall not be construed to be less than ten (10) days.
2.05 Objections
In the event the Engineer renders any decision which, in the opinion of either party hereto,
is not in accordance with the meaning and intent of this contract, either party may file with
the Engineer within thirty (30) days his written objection to the decision, and by such action
may reserve the right to submit the question so raised to litigation as hereinafter provided.
2.06 Lines and Grades
Unless otherwise specified, all lines and grades shall be furnished by the Engineer or his
representative. Whenever necessary, construction work shall be suspended to permit
performance of this work, but such suspension will be as brief as practicable and the
Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefor. The Contractor shall give the
Engineer reasonable notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All
stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless
destruction or removal by him or his employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced
at the Contractor's expense.
2.07 Contractor's Duty and Superintendence
The Contractor shall give adequate attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of
this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent English - speaking
Superintendent and any necessary assistants to supervise and direct the work. The
Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him
shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
The Contractor is and at all times shall remain an independent contractor, solely responsible
for the manner and method of completing his work under this contract, with full power and
authority to select the means, method and manner of performing such work, so long as such
methods do not adversely affect the completed improvements, the Owner and the Engineer
being interested only in the result obtained and conformity of such completed improvements
to the plans, specifications and contract.
Likewise, the Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety of himself, his employees
and other persons, as well as for the protection and safety of the improvements being erected
and the property of himself or any other person, as a result of his operations hereunder.
Engineering construction drawings and specifications, as well as any additional information
concerning the work to be performed passing from or through the Engineer, shall not be
interpreted as requiring or allowing the Contractor to deviate from the plans and
specifications; the intent of such drawings, specifications and any other such information
being to define with specificity the agreement of the parties as to the work the Contractor is
to perform. The Contractor shall be fully and completely liable, at his own expense, for
gencond.msdspec master
GC -7
design, construction, installation, and use or non -use of all items and methods incident to
performance of the contract, and for all loss, damage or injury incident thereto, either to
person or property, including, without limitation, the adequacy of all temporary supports,
shoring, bracing, scaffolding, machinery or equipment, safety precautions or devices, and
similar items or devices used by him during construction.
Any review of work in process, or any visit or observation during construction, or any
clarification of plans and specifications, by the Engineer or the Owner, or any agent,
employee, or representative of either of them, whether through personal observation on the
project site or by means of approval of shop drawings for temporary construction or
construction processes, or by other means or methods, is agreed by the Contractor to be for
the purpose of observing the extent and nature of work completed or being performed, as
measured against the drawings and specifications constituting the contract, or for the purpose
of enabling the Contractor to more fully understand the plans and specifications so that the
completed construction work will conform thereto, and shall in no way relieve the Contractor
from full and complete responsibility for the proper performance of his work on the project,
including but not limited to the propriety of means and methods of the Contractor in
performing said contract, and the adequacy of any designs, plans or other facilities for
accomplishing such performance. Deviation by the Contractor from plans and specifications
that may have been in evidence during any such visitation or observation by the Engineer,
or any of his representatives, whether called to the Contractor's attention or not, shall in no
way relieve the Contractor from his responsibility to complete all work in accordance with
said plans and specifications.
2.08 Contractor's Understanding
It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself
as to the nature and location of the work, the conformation of the ground, the character,
quality and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and
facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local
conditions, and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this contract.
The Contractor agrees that he will make no claim against the Owner or the Engineer if, in
the prosecution of the work, he finds that the actual site or subsurface conditions encountered
do not conform to those indicated by excavation, test excavation, test procedures, borings,
explorations or other subsurface excavations. No verbal agreement or conversation with any
officer, agent or employee of the Owner or the Engineer either before or after the execution
of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained.
2.09 Character of Workers
The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the
performance of the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that
whenever the Engineer shall inform him in writing that any workers on the work are, in his
gencond.mstlspec master GC -8
opinion, incompetent, unfaithful or disorderly, or refuse instructions from the Engineer in
the absence of the Superintendent, such worker shall be discharged from the work and shall
not again be employed on the work without the Engineer's written consent. No illegal alien
may be employed by any Contractor for work on this project, and a penalty of $500.00 per
day will be assessed for each day and for each illegal alien who works for the Contractor at
this project.
2.10 Contractor's Buildings
The building of structures for housing workers, or the erection of tents or other forms of
protection, will be permitted only at such places as the Engineer shall direct, and the sanitary
conditions of the grounds in or about such structures shall at all times be maintained in a
manner satisfactory to the Engineer.
2.11 Sanitation
Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work, properly secluded from
public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner
and at such points as shall be approved by the Engineer, and their use shall be strictly
enforced.
2.12 Shop Drawings
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer, with such promptness as to cause no delay in
his own work or in that of any other Contractor, four (4) checked copies, unless otherwise
specified, of all shop and/or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the
various trades, and the Engineer shall pass upon them with reasonable promptness, making
desired corrections. The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the Engineer, file
with him two (2) corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed. The
Engineer's review of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from
responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called
the Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him
from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. It shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to fully and completely review all shop drawings to ascertain their
effect on his ability to perform the required contract work in accordance with the plans and
specifications and within the contract time.
Such review by the Engineer shall be for the sole purpose of determining the general
conformity of said shop drawings or schedules to result in finished improvements in
conformity with the plans and specifications, and shall not relieve the Contractor of his duty
as an independent contractor as previously set forth, it being expressly understood and agreed
that the Engineer does not assume any duty to pass upon the propriety or adequacy of such
drawings or schedules, or any means or methods reflected thereby, in relation to the safety
gencond.mstlspec master GC -9
of either person or property during the Contractor's performance hereunder.
2.13 Preliminary Approval
The Engineer shall not have the power to waive the obligations of this contract for the
furnishing by the Contractor of good material, and of his performing good work as herein
described, and in full accordance with the plans and specifications. No failure or omission
of the Engineer to discover, object to or condemn any defective work or material shall
release the Contractor from the obligations to fully and properly perform the contract,
including without limitation, the obligation to at once tear out, remove and properly replace
any defective work or material at any time prior to final acceptance upon the discovery of
said defective work or material; provided, however, that the Engineer shall, upon request of
the Contractor, inspect and accept or reject any material furnished, and in the event the
material has been once accepted by the Engineer, such acceptance shall be binding on the
Owner unless it can be clearly shown that such material furnished does not meet the
specifications for this work.
Any questioned work may be ordered taken up or removed for re- examination by the
Engineer, prior to final acceptance, and if found not in accordance with the plans and/or
specifications for said work, all expense of removing, re- examination and replacement shall
be bome by the Contractor. Otherwise, the expense thus incurred shall be allowed as Extra
Work and shall be paid for by the Owner; provided that, where inspection or approval is
specifically required by the specifications prior to performance of certain work, should the
Contractor proceed with such work without requesting prior inspection or approval he shall
bear all expense of taking up, removing, and replacing this work if so directed by the
Engineer.
2.14 Defects and Their Remedies
It is further agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of
the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Engineer as
unsuitable or not in conformity with the plans, specifications, or the intent thereof, the
Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Engineer, forthwith remove
such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance
with this contract.
2.15 Changes and Alterations
The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the
Owner may see fit in the line, grade, form, dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein
contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the
gencond.mstlspec master GC -
construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying
performance and payment Bonds.
If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not
constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on the work that may be
dispensed with, except as provided for unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and
Payment ". If the amount of work is increased, and the work can fairly be classified under
the specifications, such increase shall be paid for according to the quantity actually done and
at the unit price, if any, established for such work under this contract, except as provided for
unit price items under Section 5 "Measurement and Payment ". Otherwise, such additional
work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In the event the Owner makes such
changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already
furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall compensate the Contractor for any
material or labor so used, and for any actual loss occasioned by such change, due to actual
expense incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned.
2.16 Inspectors
The Engineer may provide one (or more) field inspectors at the work site for the limited
purpose of observing the work in progress and reporting back to the Engineer on the extent,
nature, manner and performance of the work so that the Engineer may more effectively
perform his duties hereunder. Such inspectors may also communicate between the Engineer
and the Contractor their respective reports, opinions, questions, answers and clarifications
conceming the plans, specifications and work but shall not be deemed the agent of the
Contractor for all purposes in communicating such matters.
Such inspectors may confer with the Contractor or the Contractor's Superintendent
concerning the prosecution of the work and its conformity with the plans and specifications
but shall never be, in whole or part, responsible for or charged with, nor shall he assume any
authority or responsibility for the means, methods or manner of completing the work or of
the superintendence of the work or of the Contractor's employees. It is expressly understood
and agreed that any such inspector is not authorized by the Engineer or the Owner to
independently act for either or answer on behalf of either, any inquiries of the Contractor
concerning the plans, specifications or work. No inspector's opinion, advice, interpretation
of the plans or specifications of this contract, apparent or express approval of the means or
methods or manner of the Contractor's performance of work in progress or completed, or
discovery or failure to discover or object to defective work of materials shall release the
Contractor from his duty to complete all work in strict accordance with the plans and
specifications or stop the Owner or the Engineer from requiring that all work be fully and
properly performed including, if necessary, removal of defective or otherwise unacceptable
work and the re -doing of such work.
gencond.mstlspec master
GC -11
3. General Obligations and Responsibilities
3.01 Keeping of Plans and Specifications Accessible
The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor with an adequate and reasonable number of copies
of all plans and specifications without expense to him and the Contractor shall keep one (1)
copy of the same constantly accessible on the work, with the latest revisions noted thereon.
3.02 Ownership of Drawings
All drawings, specifications and copies thereof furnished by the Engineer shall not be reused
on other work, and, with the exception of the signed contract sets, are to be returned to him
on request, at the completion of the work. All models are the property of the Owner.
3.03 Adequacy of Design
It is understood that the Owner believes it has employed competent engineers and designers.
It is therefore agreed that the Owner shall be responsible for the adequacy of the design,
sufficiency of the Contract Documents, the safety of the structure and the practicability of
the operations of the completed project provided that the Contractor has complied with the
requirements of the said Contract Documents, all approved modifications thereof, and
additions and alterations thereto approved in writing by the Owner. The burden of proof of
such compliance shall be upon the Contractor to show that he has complied with the said
requirements of the Contract Documents, approved modifications thereof, and all approved
additions and alterations thereto.
3.04 Right of Entry
The Owner reserves the right to enter the property or location at which the works herein
contracted for are to be constructed or installed, by such agent or agents as he may elect, for
the purpose of inspecting the work or for the purpose of constructing or installing such
collateral work as the Owner may desire.
3.05 Collateral Contracts
The Owner agrees to provide, by separate contract or otherwise, all labor and material
essential to the completion of the work specifically excluded from this contract, in such
manner so as not to unreasonably delay the progress of the work or damage the Contractor,
except where such delays are specifically mentioned elsewhere in the Contract Documents.
The Owner will attempt to coordinate the collateral work of utility companies regulated by
City franchises, but the City shall not be responsible for delays or other damages to the
gencond.mst/spec master GC -
Contractor which may result from their acts or omissions.
3.06 Discrepancies and Omissions
The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer of any omissions or discrepancies
found in the contract. It is further agreed that it is the intent of this contract that all work
must be done and all material must be furnished in accordance with generally accepted
practices for construction. In the event of any discrepancies between the separate Contract
Documents, the priority of interpretation defined under "Contract Documents" shall govern.
In the event that there is still any doubt as to the meaning and intent of any portion of the
contract, specifications or drawings, the Engineer shall define what is intended to apply to
the work.
3.07 Equipment, Materials and Construction Plant
The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection
of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, all
means of construction, and any and all parts of the work, whether the Contractor has been
paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the entire work is completed and
accepted.
3.08 Damages
In the event the Contractor is damaged in the course of completion of the work by the act,
negligence, omission, mistake or default of the Owner or the Engineer, thereby causing loss
to the Contractor, the Owner agrees that he will reimburse the Contractor for such Toss. In
the event the Owner is damaged in the course of the work by the act, negligence, omission,
mistake or default of the Contractor, or should the Contractor unreasonably delay the
progress of the work being done by others on the job so as to cause loss for which the Owner
becomes liable, then the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for such loss.
3.09 Protection Against Accident to Employees and the Public
The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precautions for the safety of employees
and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal,
state, and municipal safety laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and
equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of
Accident Prevention in Construction" of the Associated General Contractors of America,
except where incompatible with federal, state, or municipal laws or regulations. The
Contractor shall provide such machinery guards, safe walkways, ladders, bridges,
gangplanks, and other safety devices. The safety precautions actually taken and their
adequacy shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, acting at his discretion as an
independent contractor.
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -13
In the event there is an accident involving injury to any individual on or near the work, the
Contractor shall immediately notify the Owner and the Engineer of the event and shall be
responsible for recording the location of the event and the circumstances surrounding the
event through photographs, interviewing witnesses, obtaining of medical reports and other
documentation that defines the event. Copies of such documentation shall be provided to the
Owner and the Engineer for their records.
3.10 Performance and Payment Bonds
Unless otherwise specified, it is further agreed by the parties to the contract that the
Contractor will execute separate performance and payment bonds, each in the sum of one
hundred (100 %) percent of the total contract price, on standard forms for this purpose,
guaranteeing faithful performance of the work and the fulfillment of any guarantee required,
and further guaranteeing payment to all persons supplying labor and materials or furnishing
him any equipment in the execution of the contract. If the contract price is $25,000.00 or
less, no payment or performance bond shall be required. It is agreed that the contract shall
not be in effect until such performance and payment bonds are fumished and approved by
the Owner.
Unless otherwise specified, the cost of the premium for the performance and payment bonds
shall be included in the price bid by the Contractor for the work under this contract, and no
extra payment for such bonds will be made by the Owner.
Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Owner, the surety company underwriting the
bonds shall be licensed to write such bonds in the State of Texas.
3.11 Losses from Natural Causes
Unless otherwise specified, all loss or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of
the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance
in the prosecution of the same, or from unusual obstructions or difficulties which may be
encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor
at his own cost and expense.
3.12 Protection of Adjoining Property
The said Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or
properties, in any way encountered, which might be injured or seriously affected by any
process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury
by reason of said process of construction; and he shall be liable for any and all claims for
such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjoining property. The Contractor
agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer against any claim
or claims for damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, arising or
gencond.mst/spec master GC -14
growing out of the performance of the contract regardless of whether or not it is caused in
part by a party indemnified hereunder, but any such indemnity shall not apply to any claim
of any kind arising solely out of the existence or character of the work.
3.13 Protection Against Claims of Subcontractors, Laborers, Materialmen and Furnishers
of Machinery, Equipment and Supplies
The Contractor agrees that he will indemnify and save the Owner and the Engineer harmless
from all claims growing out the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workers,
mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power
tools, and all supplies, including commissary, incurred in the furtherance of the performance
of this contract. When so desired by the Owner, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory
evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged
or waived. If the Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may either pay directly any
unpaid bills of which the Owner has written notice, or may withhold from the Contractor's
unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to liquidate any and all
such lawful claims. When satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been
fully discharged, payments to the Contractor shall be resumed in full in accordance with the
terms of this contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to
impose any obligation upon the Owner by either the Contractor or his surety.
3.14 Protection Against Royalties or Patented Invention
The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any
design, device, material or process covered by letter patent or copyright by suitable legal
agreement with the patentee or owner. The Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for
infringement of any patent or copyright rights and shall indemnify and save the Owner and
the Engineer harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that the Owner shall defend
all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design,
device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is
specified or required by the Owner, provided, however, if choice of altemate design, device,
material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then the Contractor shall indemnify and save
the Owner harmless form any loss on account thereof. If the material or process specified
or required by the Owner is known by the Contractor to be an infringement, the Contractor
shall be responsible for such loss unless he promptly gives such information to the Owner.
3.15 Laws and Ordinances
The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws,
ordinance and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and shall
indemnify and save harmless the Owner and the Engineer against any claim arising from the
violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations whether by the Contractor or his
employees, except where such violations are called for by the provisions of the
gencond.mstispec master
GC -15
Contract Documents. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at
variance therewith, he shall promptly notify the Engineer in writing, and any necessary
changes shall be prepared as provided in the contract for changes in the work. If the
Contractor performs any work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and
regulations, and without such notice to the Engineer, he shall bear all costs arising therefrom.
In case the Owner is a body politic and corporate, the law from which it derives its powers,
insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions
under which the Owner may enter into contract, shall be controlling and shall be considered
as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein.
3.16 Assignment and Subletting
The Contractor further agrees that he will retain personal control and will give his personal
attention to the fulfillment of this contract and that he will not assign by Power of Attorney
or otherwise, or sublet said contract without the written consent of the Engineer, and that no
part or feature of the work will be sublet to anyone objectionable to the Engineer or the
Owner. The Contractor further agrees that the subletting of any portion or feature of the
work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the
Contractor from his full obligations to the Owner as provided by this agreement.
3.17 Indemnification
The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Engineer and
their respective officers, agents and employees, from and against all damages, claims, losses,
demands, suits, judgements and costs, including reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses,
arising out of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such damage,
claim, loss, demand, suit, judgment, cost or expense:
1. is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death of any person including
Contractor's employees and any Subcontractor's employees and any Sub -
subcontractor's employees, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property
including Contractor's property (other than the work itself) and the property of any
Subcontractor of Sub - subcontractor including the loss of use resulting therefrom;
and,
2. is caused in whole or in part by any intentional or negligent act or omission of the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any one of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable,
regardless of whether or not it is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder.
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -16
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The obligation of the Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of the
Engineer, his agents or employees arising out of the preparation of maps, plans, reports,
surveys, change orders, designs or specifications, or the approval of maps, plans, reports,
surveys, change orders, designs or specifications or the issuance of or the failure to give
directions or instructions by the Engineer, his agents or employees, provided such is the sole
cause of the injury or damage.
In any and all claims against the Owner or the Engineer or any of their agents or employees
by any employee of the Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub - subcontractor, anyone
directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may
be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 3.17 shall not be limited in any
way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable
by or for the Contractor or any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor under workers'
compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
3.18 Insurance
The Contractor shall carry insurance as follows for the duration of this contract.
A. Statutory Workmen's Compensation.
Definitions:
gencond.mst/spec master
Certificate of coverage ( "certificate ") - a copy of a certificate of insurance, a
certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the Texas Workers' Compensation
Commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC -81, TWCC -82, TWCC -83, or
TWCC -84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the
person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the
project.
Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the
project until the contractor's /person's work on the project has been completed and
accepted by the governmental entity.
Persons providing services on the project ( "subcontractor" in § 406.096) - includes
all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has
undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted
directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees.
This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing
companies, motor carriers, owner- operators, employees of any such entity, or
employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project.
"Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment
or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project.
"Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage
GC -17
gencond.mst/spec master
vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets.
The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification
codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreem0nts, that meets the
statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44), for all employees
of the Contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project.
This coverage shall include the following terms:
(a) Employer's Liability limits of $100,000.00 for each accident is
required.
(b)
(c) Texas must appear in Item 3A of the Worker's Compensation
coverage or Item 3C must contain the following: "As States except
those listed in 3A and the States of NV, ND, OH, WA, WV, and
WY
The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity
prior to being awarded the contract.
If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the
coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity
showing that coverage has been extended.
The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and
provide to the govemmental entity:
(a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the
project, so the govemmental entity will have on file certificates of
coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the
project; and
no later than seven (7) calendar days after receipt by the Contractor,
a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the
coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends
during the duration of the project.
The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the
project and for one year thereafter.
(b)
"Texas Waiver of Our Right to Recover From Others" Endorsement
WC 42 03 04 shall be included in this policy.
GC -18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the Contractor knew or should have known of
any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services
on the project.
The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner
prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons
providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how
a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage.
The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to
provide services on the project to:
(a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes
and payroll amounts of filing of any coverage agreements, that meets
the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44),
for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the
duration of the project;
gencond.mstispec master
(b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the
project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being
provided for all employees of the person providing services on the
project, for the duration of the project;
(c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new
certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage
period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to
the Contractor:
(1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning
work on the project; and
(2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage,
prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period
shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the
duration of the project;
(e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of
the project and for one year thereafter;
(f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal
delivery, within ten (10) calendar days after the person knew or
should have known of any change that materially affects the
GC -19
contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform
as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage
to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services.
By signing this contract, or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of
coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees
of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by
workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will
be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all
coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the
case of a self - insured, with the Commission's Division of Self- Insurance Regulation.
Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to
administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, and/or other civil actions.
The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of
contract by the contractor that entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract
void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten (10) calendar days after
the receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity.
B. Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with minimum Bodily Injury limits of
$300,000 for each occurrence including like coverage for acts and omissions of
Subcontractors and contractual liability coverage.
C. Property Damage Insurance with minimum limits of $50,000 for each occurrence
including like coverage for acts and omissions of Subcontractors and contractual
liability coverage.
D. Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, non - owned, and hired vehicles with
minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $100,000 for each person and $300,000 for each
occurrence and Property Damage minimum limits of $50,000 for each occurrence.
Contractor shall require Subcontractors to provide Automobile Liability Insurance
with same minimum limits.
(g)
The Contractor shall not commence work at the site under this contract until he has obtained
all required insurance and until such insurance has been approved by the Owner and the
Engineer. The Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence work until all
insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of the insurance by the Owner
and the Engineer shall not relieve or decrease the liability of the Contractor hereunder.
gencond.mstispec master GC -
provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project;
and
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
The required insurance must be written by a company licensed to do business in Texas at the
time the policy is issued. In addition, the company must be acceptable to the Owner and all
insurance (other than workers' compensation) shall be endorsed to include the Owner as an
additional insured thereunder.
The Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be cancelled nor permit any insurance to
lapse. All insurance certificates shall include a clause to the effect that the policy shall not
be cancelled or reduced, restricted or limited until ten (10) days after the Owner has received
written notice as evidenced by return receipt of registered or certified letter. Certificates of
insurance shall contain transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing in
particular those insured, the extent of the insurance, the location and the operations to which
the insurance applies, the expiration date, and the above - mentioned notice of cancellation
clause.
3.19 Final Clean - up
Upon the completion of the work and before acceptance and final payment will be made, the
Contractor shall clean and remove from the site of the work all surplus and discarded
materials, temporary structures and debris of every kind. He shall leave the site of the work
in a neat and orderly condition at least equal to that which originally existed. Surplus and
waste materials removed from the site of the work shall be disposed of at locations
satisfactory to the Engineer.
In the event the Contractor fails or refuses to clean and remove surplus materials and debris
as above provided, the Owner or the Engineer may do so, or cause same to be done, at the
Contractor's expense, and the reasonable cost thereof shall be deducted from the final
payment.
3.20 Guarantee Against Defective Work
The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship and that the work is in conformance
with the plans and specifications included in this contract for a period of one year from the
date of acceptance of the project. Said warranty binds the Contractor to correct any work
that does not conform with such plans and specifications or any defects in workmanship or
materials furnished under this contract which may be discovered within the said one year
period. The Contractor shall at his own expense correct such defect within thirty (30) days
after receiving written notice of such defect from the Owner or the Engineer by repairing
same to the condition called for in the Contract Documents and plans and specifications.
Should the Contractor fail or refuse to repair such defect within the said thirty (30) day
period or to provide acceptable assurances that such repair work will be completed within
a reasonable time thereafter, the Owner may repair or cause to be repaired any such defect
at the Contractor's expense.
gencond.mst'spec master GC -21
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�1
1
1
i
1
1
1
3.21 Testing of Materials
Unless otherwise specified, testing of all materials to be incorporated into the project will be
as directed by the Engineer at the expense of the Owner. All retesting for work rejected on
the basis of test results will be at the expense of the Contractor and the extent of the retesting
shall be determined by the Engineer. The Engineer may require additional testing for failing
tests and may require two (2) passing retests before acceptance will be made by the Owner.
The testing laboratory will be designated by the Owner.
All materials to be incorporated into the project must meet the requirements of these
specifications. For manufactured materials such as reinforcing steel, expansion joint
materials, concrete pipe, cement, miscellaneous steel, cast iron materials, etc., the Contractor
will be required to furnish a manufacturer's certificate stating that the material meets the
requirements specified for this project.
3.22 Wage Rates (Information From Chapter 2258 Texas Government Code Title 10)
2288.021. Duty of Government Entity to Pay Prevailing Wage Rates
a. The state or any political subdivision of the state shall pay a worker employed by it or
on behalf of it:
(1) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for work of
a similar character in the locality in which the work is performed; and
(2) not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for legal
holiday and overtime work.
b. Subsection (a) does not apply to maintenance work.
c. A worker is employed on a public work for the purposes of this section if the worker
is employed by a contractor or subcontractor in the execution of a contract for the
public work with the state, a political subdivision of the state, or any officer or public
body of the state or a political subdivision of the state.
2258.023. Prevailing Wage Rates to be Paid by Contractor and Subcontractor; Penalty
a. The contractor who is awarded a contract by a public body or a subcontractor of the
contractor shall pay not less than the rates determined under Section 2258.022 to a
worker employed by it in the execution of the contract.
b. A contractor or subcontractor who violates this section shall pay to the state or a
political subdivision of the state on whose behalf the contract is made, $60 for each
worker employed for each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less
than the wage rates stipulated in the contract. A public body awarding a contract shall
specify this penalty in the contract.
c. A contractor or subcontractor does not violate this section if a public body awarding
a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates, and specify the rates in the
gencand.mstlspec master
GC -22
contract as provided by Section 2258.022.
d. The public body shall use any money collected under this section to offset the costs
incurred in the administration of this chapter.
e. A municipality is entitled to collect a penalty under this section only if the municipality
has a population of more than 10,000.
2258.051. Duty of Public Body to Hear Complaints and Withhold Payment
A public body awarding a contract, and an agent or officer of the public body, shall:
1. take cognizance of complaints of all violations of this chapter committed in the
execution of the contract; and
2. withhold money forfeited or required to be withheld under this Chapter from the
payments to the contractor under the contract, except that, the public body may not
withhold money from other than the final payment without determination by the public
body that there is good cause to believe that the contractor has violated this chapter.
1997
Applicable wage rates are shown in Section 06 WAGE RATES of the SPECIAL CONDITIONS.
4. Prosecution and Progress
4.01 Time and Order of Completion
It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that
the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute his work at such times and seasons, in such order
of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conducive to economy of construction;
provided, however, that the order and the time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall
be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans
and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the proposal: provided,
also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by his own force,
the Engineer may direct the time and manner of constructing the work done under this
contract, so that conflict will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done
for the Owner shall be harmonized.
The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Engineer,
schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor proposes to carry on the Work,
with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work, and estimated dates
of completion of the several parts.
4.02 Extension of Time
gencond.mstispec master
GC -23
WR1001 July
Should the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by any act or neglect of the
Owner or the Engineer, or of any employee of either, or by other contractors employed by the
Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strikes, lockouts, fires, and unusual delays
by common carriers, or unavoidable cause or causes beyond the Contractor's control, or by any
cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then an extension of time shall be
allowed for completing the work, sufficient to compensate for the delay, the amount of the
extension to be determined by the Engineer; provided, however, that the Contractor shall give
the Engineer prompt notice in writing of the cause of such delay. Adverse weather conditions
will not be justification for extension of time on "Calendar Days" contracts.
4.03 Hindrances and Delays
No claims shall be made by the Contractor for damages resulting from hindrances or delays
from any cause (except where the work is stopped by order of and for the convenience of the
Owner) during the progress of any portion of the work embraced in this contract. In case said
work shall be stopped by the act of the Owner, then such expense as in the judgment of the
Engineer is caused by such stoppage of said work shall be paid by the Owner to the
Contractor.
5. Measurement and Payment
5.01 Quantities and Measurements
No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured
and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered,
unless otherwise specifically provided.
5.02 Estimated Quantities
This agreement, including the specifications, plans and estimate, is intended to show clearly
all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities
are shown for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this
contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable
cost of the work and for comparing the proposals offered for the work. It is understood and
agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and material to be furnished under this
contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment
under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of such
work done and material furnished.
Where payment is based on the unit price method, the Contractor agrees that he will make no
claim for damages, anticipated profits or otherwise on account of any differences which may
be found between the quantities of work actually done, the material actually furnished under
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -24
this contract and the estimated quantities contemplated and contained in the proposal;
provided, however, that in case the actual quantity of any major item should become as much
as twenty percent (20 %) more than, or twenty percent (20 %) less than the estimated or
contemplated quantity for such items, then either party to this agreement, upon demand, shall
be entitled to revised consideration upon the portion of the work above or below twenty
percent (20 %) of the estimated quantity.
A "Major Item" shall be construed to be any individual bid item incurred in the proposal that
has a total cost equal to or greater that five percent (5 %) of the total contract cost, computed
on the basis of the proposal quantities and the contract unit prices.
Any revised consideration is to be determined by agreement between the parties, otherwise by
the terms of this agreement, as provided under "Extra Work ".
5.03 Price of Work
In consideration of the furnishing of all the necessary labor, equipment and material, and the
completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the completion of all work and on the
delivery of all material embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and
stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the prices set forth in the
proposal hereto attached, which has been made a part of this contract. The Contractor hereby
agrees to receive such prices in full for furnishing all material and all labor required for the
aforesaid work, also for all expense incurred by him, and for well and truly performing the
same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement.
5.04 Partial Payments
On or before the first day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a
statement showing the total value of the work performed up to and including the 25th day of
the preceding month. The statement shall also include the value of all sound materials
delivered on the job site and to be included in the work and all partially completed work
whether bid as a lump sum or a unit item which in the opinion of the Engineer is acceptable.
The Engineer shall examine and approve or modify and approve such statement.
The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the 20th day of the current month the
total amount of the approved statement, less five percent (5 %) of the amount thereof, which
five percent (5 %) shall be retained until final payment, and further less all previous payments
and all further sums that may by retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement. It
is understood, however, that in case the whole work be near to completion and some
unexpected and unusual delay occurs due to no fault or neglect on the part of the Contractor,
then the Owner may, upon written recommendation of the Engineer, pay a reasonable and
equitable portion of the retained percentage to the Contractor; or the Contractor, at the Owner's
option, may be relieved of the obligation to fully complete the work and, thereupon, the
gencond.mst/spec master GC -25
Contractor shall receive payment of the balance due him under the contract subject only to the
conditions stated under "Final Payment ".
5.05 Use of Completed Portions
The Owner shall have the right to take possession of and use any completed or partially
completed portions of the work, notwithstanding the time for completing the entire work or
such portions may not have expired. Such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an
acceptance of any work not completed in accordance with the Contract Documents. If such
prior use increases the cost or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra
compensation, extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when, in the Contractor's opinion, the contract is
"substantially completed" and when so notifying the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish to
the Engineer in writing a detailed list of unfinished work. The Engineer will review the
Contractor's list of unfinished work and will add thereto such items as the Contractor has
failed to include. The "substantial completion" of the structure or facility shall not excuse the
Contractor from performing all of the work undertaken, whether of a minor or major nature,
and thereby completing the structure or facility in accordance with the Contract Documents.
5.06 Final Completion and Acceptance
Within ten (10) days after the Contractor has given the Engineer written notice that the work
has been completed, or substantially completed, the Engineer and the Owner shall inspect the
work and within said time, if the work is found to be completed in accordance with the
Contact Documents, the Engineer shall issue to the Owner and the Contractor his Certificate
of Completion, and thereupon it shall be the duty of the Owner to issue a Certificate of
Acceptance to the Contractor or to advise the Contractor in writing of the reason for non-
acceptance.
5.07 Final Payment
Upon the issuance of the Certificate of Completion, the Engineer shall proceed to make final
measurements and prepare final statement for the value of all work performed and materials
furnished under the terms of the agreement and shall certify same to the Owner, who shall pay
to the Contractor on or before 35th day after the date of the Certificate of Completion, the
balance due the Contractor under the terms of this contract; and said payment shall become
due in any event upon said performance by the Contractor. Neither the Certificate of
Acceptance nor the final payment, nor any provision in the Contract Documents, shall relieve
the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required.
5.08 Payments Withheld
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -26
The Owner may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the
whole or part of any certificate to such extent as may be necessary to protect himself from loss
on account of:
a) Defective work not remedied or other obligations hereunder not done.
b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of claims.
c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for material
or labor.
d) Damage to the Owner or another contractor's work, material or equipment.
e) Reasonable doubt that the work can be completed for the unpaid balance of the contract
amount.
f) Reasonable indication that the work will not completed within the contract time.
g) Other causes affecting the performance of the contract.
When the above grounds are removed or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory
to the Owner, which will protect the Owner in the amount withheld, payment shall be made
for amounts withheld because of them.
5.09 Delayed Payments
Should the Owner fail to make payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial or
final statement, when payment is due, then the Owner shall pay to the Contractor, in addition
to the sum shown as due by such statement, interest thereon at the rate of six percent (6 %) per
annum, unless otherwise specified, from date due as provided under "Partial Payments" and
"Final Payment," until fully paid, which shall fully liquidate any injury to the Contractor
growing out of such delay in payment. It is expressly agreed that delay by the Owner in
making payment to the Contractor of the sum named in any partial or final statement shall not
constitute a breach of this contract on the part of the Owner nor an abandonment thereof nor
shall it to any extent or for any time relieve the Contractor of his obligations to fully and
completely perform hereunder.
6. Extra Work and Claims
6.01 Change Orders
Without invalidating this agreement, the Owner may at any time or from time to time order
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -27
additions, deletions or revisions to the work; such changes will be authorized by change order
to be prepared by the Engineer for execution by the Owner and the Contractor. The change
order shall set forth the basis for any change in contract price, as hereinafter set forth for extra
work, and any change in contract time which may result from the change.
In the event the Contractor shall refuse to execute a change order which has been prepared by
the Engineer and executed by the Owner, the Engineer may in writing instruct the Contractor
to proceed with the work as set forth in the change order and the Contractor may make claim
against the Owner for extra work involved therein, as hereinafter provided.
6.02 Minor Changes
The Engineer may authorize minor changes in the work not inconsistent with the overall intent
of the Contract Documents and not involving an increase in contract price. If the Contractor
believes that any minor change or alteration authorized by the Engineer involves extra work
and entitles him to an increase in the contract price, the Contractor shall make written request
to the Engineer for a written field order.
In such case, the Contractor by copy of his communication to the Engineer or otherwise in
writing shall advise the Owner of his request to the Engineer for a written field order and that
work involved may result in an increase in the contract price.
Any request by the Contractor for a change in contract price shall be made prior to beginning
the work covered by the proposed change.
6.03 Extra Work
It is agreed that the basis of compensation to the Contractor for work either added or deleted
by a change order or for which a claim for extra work is made shall be determined by the unit
prices upon which this contract was bid to the extent such work can be fairly classified within
the various work item descriptions and for work items that cannot be so classified by one or
more of the following methods:
gencond.mst/spec master
Method (A)
By agreed unit prices; or
Method (B)
By agreed lump sum; or
Method (C)
If neither Method (A) nor Method (B) is agreed upon before the extra work is
commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the "actual field cost' of the
work, plus fifteen percent (15 %).
GC -28
In the event said extra work is performed and paid for under Method (C), then the provisions
of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost
to the Contractor of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, and
materials, supplies, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually
employed or used on such extra work, plus actual equipment, for the time actually employed
or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together
with all power, fuel, lubricants, water and similar operating expenses, also all necessary
incidental expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security,
Old Age Benefits and other payroll taxes, and a rateable proportion of premiums on
performance and payment bonds and maintenance bonds, public liability and property damage
and workers' compensation, and all other insurance as may be required by any law or
ordinance, or directed or agreed to by the Owner. The Engineer may direct the form in which
accounts of the "actual field cost" shall be kept and the records of these accounts shall be made
available to the Engineer. The Engineer or the Owner may also specify in writing, before the
work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and
equipment to be used; otherwise these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless
otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined
by using one hundred percent (100 %), unless otherwise specified, of the latest schedule of
Equipment Ownership Expense adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America.
Where practicable the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be
incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15 %) of the "actual field
cost" to be paid the Contractor shall cover and compensate him for his profit, overhead,
general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense
not embraced within the "actual field cost" as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's
camp or field office must be maintained primarily on account of such extra work; then the cost
to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost."
No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by the Engineer.
In case any orders or instructions, either oral or written, appear to the Contractor to involve
extra work for which he should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction
time, he shall make written request to the Engineer for written order authorizing such extra
work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work,
or as to the payment therefor, and the Engineer insists upon its performance, the Contractor
shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep an
accurate account of the "actual field cost" thereof, as provided under Method (C). The
Contractor will thereby preserve the right to submit the matter of payment to mediation or
litigation.
6.04 Time of Filing Claims
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -29
It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented
by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Engineer within thirty (30) days after
the Engineer has given any directions, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to
take exception. The Engineer shall reply within thirty (30) days to such written exceptions by
the Contractor and render his final decision in writing. In case the Contractor should appeal
from the Engineer's decision, any demand for mediation shall be filed with the Engineer and
the Owner in writing within ten (10) days after the date of delivery to Contractor of the
Engineer's final decision. It is further agreed that final acceptance of the work by the Owner
and the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any claims by either
party, except claims by Owner for defective work or enforcement of warranties and except as
noted otherwise in the Contract Documents.
6.05 Continuing Performance
The Contractor shall continue performance of the contract during all disputes or disagreements
with the Owner. The production or delivery of goods, the furnishing of services and the
construction of projects or facilities shall not be delayed, prejudiced or postponed pending
resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner may otherwise agree in
writing.
7. Abandonment of Contract
7.01 Abandonment by Contractor
In case the Contractor should abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within ten (10) days
after written notification from the Owner or the Engineer, or if the Contractor fails to comply
with the orders of the Engineer when such orders are consistent with the Contract Documents,
then and in that case, where performance and payment bonds exist, the sureties on these bonds
shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work, and a copy of said notice shall
be delivered to the Contractor.
After receiving said notice of abandonment, the Contractor shall not remove from the work
any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together
with any materials and equipment under contract for the work, may be held for use on the
work by the Owner or the surety on the performance bond, or another contractor in completion
of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefor (except when
used in connection with extra work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under
Section 6 herein), it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will
ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement.
Where there is no performance bond provided or in case the surety should fail to commence
compliance with the notice for completion hereinbefore provided for, within ten (10) days after
service of such notice, then the Owner may provide for completion of the work in either of the
gencond.mst/spec master
GC -30
following elective manners:
(2) The Owner, under competitive bids taken after notice published as required by
law, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the
same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case there
is any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to
what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be
charged to the Contractor and the surety shall be and remain bound therefor.
However, should the cost to complete any such contract prove to be less than
would have been the cost to complete under this contract, the Contractor and/or
his surety shall be credited therewith.
When the work shall have been substantially completed, the Contractor and his surety shall
be so notified and Certificates of Completion and Acceptance, as provided in Paragraph 5.06
hereinabove, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified
by the Engineer as being correct, shall then be prepared and delivered to the Contractor and
his surety, whereupon the Contractor and/or his surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall
pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within fifteen (15) days after the date of
such Certificate of Completion.
In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that
which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor
under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the balance
shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or
supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his surety.
Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his
surety fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there
remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice
thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials, shall be mailed to the
gencond.mst/spec master
(1) The Owner may thereupon employ such force of men and use such machinery,
equipment, tools, materials and supplies as the Owner may deem necessary to
complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery,
equipment, tools, materials and supplies to the Contractor, and expense so
charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such monies as may
be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under
and by virtue of this agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum
which would have been payable under this contract if the same had been
completed by the Contractor, then the Contractor shall receive the difference.
In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable
under this contract if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then the
Contractor and/or his surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner,
or
GC -31
Contractor and his surety at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided,
however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After
mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor
and his surety subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such
property. After fifteen (15) days from the date of said notice, the Owner may sell such
machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such
sale to the credit of the Contractor and his surety. Such sale may be made at either public or
private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any
machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies, which remain on the work, and belong to
persons other than the Contractor or his surety, to their proper owners. The books on all
operations provided herein shall be opened to the Contractor and his surety.
7.02 Abandonment by Owner
In case the Owner shall fail to comply with the terms of this contract, and should fail to
comply with said terms within ten (10) days after written notification by the Contractor, then
the Contractor may suspend or wholly abandon the work, and may remove therefrom all
machinery, tools and equipment, and all materials on the site of work that have not been
included in payments to the Contractor and have not been wrought into the work. Thereupon,
the Engineer shall make an estimate of the total amount earned by the Contractor, which
estimate shall include the value of all work actually completed by said Contractor (at the prices
stated in the attached proposal where unit prices are used), the value of all partially completed
work at a fair and equitable price, and the amount of all extra work performed at the prices
agreed upon, or provided for by the terms of this contract, and a reasonable sum to cover the
cost of any provisions made by the Contractor to carry the whole work to completion and
which cannot be utilized. The Engineer shall then make a final statement of the balance due
the Contractor by deducting from the above estimate all previous payments by the Owner and
all other sums that may be retained by the Owner under the terms of this agreement and shall
certify same to the Owner who shall pay to the Contractor on or before thirty (30) days after
the date of the notification by the Contractor the balance shown by said final statement as due
the Contractor, under the terms of this agreement.
8. Subcontractors
8.01 Award of Subcontracts for Portions of the Work
Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions to Bidders, the
Contractor, as soon as practicable after the award of the contract, shall furnish to the Engineer
in writing for acceptance by the Owner and the Engineer a list of the names of the
Subcontractors proposed for the principal portions of the work. The Engineer shall promptly
notify the Contractor in writing if either the Owner or the Engineer, after due investigation,
has objection to any Subcontractor on such list and does not accept him. Failure of the Owner
or the Engineer to make objection promptly to any Subcontractor on the list shall constitute
gencond.mstlspec master
GC -32
acceptance of such Subcontractor.
The Contractor shall not contract with any Subcontractor or any person or organization
(including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design)
proposed for portions of the work designated in the Contract Documents or in the Instructions
to Bidders or, if none is so designated, with any Subcontractor proposed for the principal
portions of the work who has been rejected by the Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor
will not be required to contract with any Subcontractor or person or organization against
whom he has a reasonable objection.
If the Owner or the Engineer refuses to accept any Subcontractor or person or organization on
a list submitted by the Contractor in response to the requirements of the Contract Documents
or the Instructions to Bidders, the Contractor shall submit an acceptable substitute and the
contract amount shall be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such
substitution and an appropriate change order shall be issued; however, no increase in the
contract amount shall be allowed for any such substitution unless the Contractor has acted
promptly and responsively in submitting for acceptance any list or lists of names as required
by the Contract Documents or the Instructions to Bidders.
If the Owner or the Engineer requires a change of any proposed Subcontractor or person or
organization previously accepted by them, the contract amount shall be increased or decreased
by the difference in cost occasioned by such change and an appropriate change order shall be
issued.
The Contractor shall not make any substitution for any Subcontractor or person or organization
who has been accepted by the Owner and the Engineer, unless the substitution is acceptable
to the Owner and the Engineer.
8.02 Subcontractual Relations
All work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to an appropriate
written agreement between the Contractor and the Subcontractor (and where appropriate
between Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors) which shall contain provisions that:
(1) preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and the Engineer under the
contract with respect to the work to be performed under the subcontract so that
the subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights;
(2) require that such work be performed in accordance with the requirements of the
Contract Documents;
(3)
gencond.mst/spec master
require submission to the Contractor of the applications for payment under
each subcontract to which the Contractor is a party, in reasonable time to
GC -33
enable the Contractor to apply for payment in accordance with this contract;
(4) require that all claims for additional costs, extensions of time, damages for
delays or otherwise with respect to subcontracted portions of the work shall be
submitted to the Contractor (via any Subcontractor or Sub - subcontractor where
appropriate) in sufficient time so that the Contractor may comply in the manner
provided in the Contract Documents for like claims by the Contractor upon the
Owner;
(5) obligate each subcontractor specifically to consent to the provisions of this
section.
A copy of all such subcontract agreements shall be filed by the Contractor with the Engineer
before the Subcontractor shall be allowed to commence work.
8.03 Payments to Subcontractors
The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, an
amount directly based upon the value of the work performed and allowed to the Contractor on
account of such Subcontractor's work, less the percentage retained from payments to the
Contractor. The Contractor shall also require each Subcontractor to make similar payments
to his subcontractors.
If the Engineer fails to approve a payment for any cause which is the fault of the Contractor
and not the fault of a particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay the Subcontractor on
demand made at any time after the Certificate for Payment should otherwise have been issued,
for his work to the extent completed, less the retained percentage.
The Engineer may, on request and at his discretion, furnish to any Subcontractor, if
practicable, information regarding percentages of completion certified to the Contractor on
account of work done by such Subcontractors.
Neither the Owner nor the Engineer shall have any obligation to pay or to see to the payment
of any monies to such Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required.
9. Separate Contracts
9.01 Owner's Right to Award Separate Contracts
The Owner reserves the right to award other contracts in connection with other portions of the
project under these or similar conditions of the contract.
When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the project, the Contractor" in
gencond.mst/spec master GC -34
the contract documents in each case shall be the contractor who signs each separate contract.
9.02 Mutual Responsibility of Contractors
The Contractor shall afford other contractors reasonable opportunity for the introduction and
storage of their materials and equipment and the execution of their work, and shall properly
connect and coordinate his work with theirs.
If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results upon the work of
any other separate contractor, the Contractor shall inspect and promptly report to the Engineer
any apparent discrepancies or defects in such work that render it unsuitable for such proper
execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to so inspect and report shall constitute an
acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper to receive his work, except as to
defects which may develop in the other separate contractor's work after the execution of the
Contractor's work.
Should the Contractor cause damage to the work or property of any separate contractor on the
project, the Contractor shall, upon due notice, settle with such other contractor by agreement,
if he will so settle. If such separate contractor sues the Owner or initiates an proceeding
allowed hereunder on account of any damage alleged to have been so sustained, the Owner
shall notify the Contractor who shall defend such proceedings at the Contractors expense, and
if any judgment or award against the Owner arises therefrom the Contractor shall pay or
satisfy it and shall reimburse the Owner for all attorney's fees and court costs or other costs
which the Owner has incurred.
9.03 Cutting and Patching under Separate Contracts
The Contractor shall be responsible for any cutting, fitting and patching that may be required
to complete his work, except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall not endanger any work of any other contractors by cutting, excavating
or otherwise altering any work and shall not cut or alter the work of any other contractor
except with the written consent of the Engineer.
Any costs caused by defective or ill -timed work shall be bome by the party responsible
therefor.
10. Protection of Persons and Property
10.01 Safety Precautions and Programs
The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
precautions and programs in connection with the work.
gencond.mstfspec master
GC -35
10.02 Safety of Persons and Property
The Contractor shall take all reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shall provide all
reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
(1)
(2)
(3)
all employees on the work and all other persons who may be affected thereby:
all the work and all materials and equipment to be incorporated therein,
whether in storage or off the site, under the care, custody or control of the
Contractor or any of his Subcontractors or Sub - subcontractors; and
other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns,
walks, pavements, fences, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for
removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful
orders of any public authority having jurisdiction for the safety of persons or property or to
protect them from damage, injury or loss. He shall erect and maintain, as required by existing
conditions and progress of the work, all reasonable safeguards for safety and protection,
including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety
regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent utilities.
When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment is necessary
for the execution of the work, the Contractor shall exercise the utmost care and shall carry on
such activities under the supervision of properly qualified personnel.
All blasting, including methods of storing and handling explosives and highly inflammable
materials, shall conform to federal, state, local laws and ordinances. All city ordinances shall
be complied with even though some or all of the blasting is done outside the city limits unless
the applicable ordinance is in conflict with the law of the jurisdiction where the action is being
taken.
The following is a list of requirements in addition to federal, state, and local laws and
ordinances:
The Contractor shall furnish the City of Round Rock with a Certificate of
Blasting Insurance in the amount of $300,000.00 for each contract, at least
twenty-four (24) hours prior to using explosives. A blasting permit must be
obtained from the city at least five (5) days prior to use of explosives. If
blasting is covered under the Contractor's General Insurance Certificate for
each contract, a separate blasting certificate will not be required.
2. The following public utility companies and city departments will be notified
by the Contractor, on every occasion, at least twenty-four (24) hours prior to
gencond.mst{spec master GC -36
All damage or loss to any property referred to in this article caused in whole or in part by the
Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Sub- subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be
remedied by the Contractor, except damage or loss attributable solely to faulty drawings or
specifications or solely to the acts or omissions of the Owner or the Engineer or anyone
employed by either of them, and not attributable in any degree to the fault or negligence of the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of his organization at the site whose duty
shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent
unless otherwise designated in writing by the Contractor to the Owner and the Engineer.
10.03 Location and Protection of Utilities
gencond.msdspec master
the use of explosives: Water and Wastewater, Electric, Gas, Telephone and the
City Engineering Department.
3. Explosive materials to be used shall be limited to blasting agents and dynamite,
unless prior approval of other materials is obtained in writing from the
Engineering Department.
4. During blasting, all reasonable precautions shall be taken to protect pedestrians,
passing vehicles, and public or private property. Blasting mats or protective
cover shall be used when required by the City Inspector, the permit, or by safe
blasting practices.
5. All explosives shall be stored in accordance with Chapter 5, Section 5.200, of
the City Code.
6. The Director of Engineering or his representative shall have the right to limit
the use of explosives and/or blasting methods which in his opinion are
dangerous to the public or nearby property of any kind.
7. The Contractor, at his expense, shall promptly repair or replace all items known
to be damaged as a result of blasting. All claims of damage shall be
investigated by the City of Round Rock or by consulting firms approved by the
city.
8. The Contractor shall maintain accurate records throughout the blasting
operations showing the type explosive used, number of holes, pounds per hole,
depth of hole, total pounds per shot, delays used, date and time of blast and
initials of the inspector. The Contractor is fully responsible for all claims
resulting from his blasting operation.
GC -37
Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract, the Contractor shall be solely responsible
for the location and protection of any and all public utility lines and utility customer service
lines in the work area. The Contractor shall exercise due care to locate and to mark, uncover
or otherwise protect all such lines in the construction zone and any of the Contractor's work
or storage areas. Upon request, the Owner shall provide such information as it has about the
location and grade of water, sewer, gas, and telephone and electric lines and other utilities in
the work area but such information shall not relieve or be deemed to be in satisfaction of the
Contractor's obligation hereunder, which shall be primary and nondelegable. Any such lines
damaged by the Contractor's operations shall be immediately repaired by the Contractor or he
shall cause such damage to be repaired at his expense.
gencond.mstlspec master GC -38
5.0 SPECIAL CONDITIONS
SECTION 01- INFORMATION
01-01 ENGINEER
specond.mat/specs
The word "Engineer" in these Specifications shall be understood as referring to the
City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664, Engineer of
the Owner, or the Engineer's authorized representative to act in any particular
position for the Owner.
01 -02 COPIES OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS FURNISHED
The Agreement will be prepared in not less than five (5) counterpart (original
signed) sets. Owner will furnish Contractor two (2) sets of conforming Contract
Documents and Specifications and four (4) sets of Plans free of charge, and
additional sets will be obtained from the Engineer at commercial reproduction rates
plus 20% for handling.
01 -03 GOVERNING CODES
01-05 LOCATION
All construction as provided for under these Plans and Specifications shall be
governed by any existing Resolutions, Codes and Ordinances, and any subsequent
amendments or revisions thereto as set forth by the Owner.
01 -04 LIOUIDATED DAMAGES FOR FAILURE TO COMPLETE ON TIME
The Contractor agrees that time is of the essence for this Contract and that the
definite value of damages which would result from delay would be incapable of
ascertainment and uncertain, so that for each day of delay beyond the number of
days herein agreed upon for the completion of the work herein specified and
contracted for, after due allowance for such extension of time as is provided for
under the provisions of Section 4.02 of the General Conditions, the Owner may
withhold permanently from the Contractor's total compensation, not as penalty but
as liquidated damages, the sum of 5250.00 per calendar day.
The location of work shall be as mentioned in the Notice to Bidders and as indicated
on Plans.
S - 1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
01 -06 USAGE OF WATER
All water used during construction shall be provided by the City. The City shall
specify the location from which the Contractor is to procure water. The Contractor
shall be responsible for providing all apparatus necessary for procuring, storing,
transporting and using water during construction. The Contractor shall strive to use
that amount of water which is reasonable to perform the work associated with this
contract and shall endeavor to avoid excessive waste. The Contractor will be
required to pay for all water used if it is found that unnecessary or excessive waste
is occurring during construction.
01 -07 PAY ESTIMATES
If pay estimates from the Contractor are not received by the Engineer on or before
the time specified in Section 5.04 of the General Conditions, then the pay estimate
will not be processed and will be returned to Contractor.
SECTION 02- SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
02-01 CROSSING UTILITIES
Prior to commencing the work associated with this contract, it shall be the
Contractor's responsibility to make arrangements with the Owners of such utility
companies to uncover their particular utility lines or otherwise confirm their location.
Certain utility companies perform such services at their own expense, however,
where such is not the case, the Contractor will cause such work to be done at his own
expense.
02 -02 UTILITY SERVICES FOR CONSTRUCTION
The Contractor will be responsible for providing his own utility services while
performing the work associated with this contract. No additional payment will be
made for this item.
specond.msdspecs
SC -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02 -03 GUARANTEES
The Contractor warrants the materials and workmanship and that the work is in
conformance with the plans and specifications included in this contract for the period
that the Warranty Bond, as outlined in Section 04 of the Special Conditions, is in
effect. Upon notice from Owner, the Contractor shall repair defects in all
construction or materials which develop during specified period and at no cost to
Owner. Neither final acceptance, Certificate of Completion, fmal payment nor any
provision in Contract Documents relieves Contractor of above guarantee. Notice of
observed defects will be given with reasonable promptness. Failure to repair or
replace defect upon notice entitles Owner to repair or replace same and recover
reasonable cost thereof from Contractor.
02 -04 MINIMUM WAGE SCALE
Contractors are required to pay prevailing wage rates to laborers, workmen and
mechanics employed on behalf of the City engaged in the construction of public
works. The wage rate for these jobs shall be the general prevailing wage rates for
work of a similar character. This applies to Contractors and Subcontractors. The
Contractors and Subcontractors shall keep and make available records of workers and
their wages. Contractors and Subcontractors shall pay the prevailing wage rates as
adopted by the Owner. There is a statutory penalty of $60.00 per worker per day or
portion of a day that the prevailing wage rate is not paid by the Contractor or any
Subcontractor.
02 -05 LIMIT OF FINANCIAL RESOURCES
specond.msUspea
The Owner has a limited amount of financial resources committed to this Project;
therefore, it shall be understood by all bidders that the Owner may be required to
change and/or delete any items which he may feel is necessary to accomplish all or
part of the scope of work within its limit of financial resources. Contractor shall be
entitled to no claim for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of work that
may be omitted. At any time during the duration of this contract, the Owner reserves
the right to omit any work from this contract. Unit prices for all items previously
approved in this contract shall be used to delete or add work per change order.
SC -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
02 -06 CONSTRUCTION REVIEW
specond.msUspecs
The Owner shall provide a project representative to review the quality of materials
and workmanship.
02 - 07 LIMITS OF WORK AND PAYMENT
It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to complete all work included in this
Contract, so authorized by the Owner, as described in the contract documents and
technical specifications. All items of work not specifically paid for in the bid
proposal shall be included in the unit price bids. Any question arising as to the limits
of work shall be left up to the interpretation of the Engineer.
02 - 08 PAYMENT FOR MATERIALS ON HAND
Owner will not pay for materials on hand. Payment will be made for work completed
in accordance with monthly estimate procedure stipulated in the General Conditions
of the Agreement.
02 - 09 "AS BUILT" DRAWINGS
The Contractor shall mark all changes and revisions on all of his copies of the
working drawings during the course of the Project as they occur. Upon completion
of the Project and prior to final acceptance and payment, the Contractor shall submit
to the Engineer one set of his working drawings, dated and signed by himself and his
project superintendent and labeled as "As- Built ", that shows all changes and
revisions outlined above and that shows field locations of all above ground
appurtenances including but not limited to valves, fire hydrants and manholes. These
as -built drawings shall become the property of the Owner. Each appurtenance shall
be located by at least two (2) horizontal distances measured from existing, easily
identifiable, immovable appurtenances such as fire hydrants or valves. Property pins
can be used for as- builts tie -ins provided no existing utilities as previously described
are available. Costs for delivering as -built drawings shall be subsidiary to other bid
items.
02 - 10 LAND FOR WORK
Owner provides, as indicated on Drawings, land upon which work is to done, right -
of -way for access to same and such other lands which are designated for use of
Contractor. Contractor provides, at his expense and without liability of Owner, any
additional land and access thereto that may be required for his construction
operations, temporary construction facilities, or for storage of materials.
SC -4
02 -11 DEVIATIONS OCCASIONED BY UTILITY STRUCTURES
Whenever existing utilities, not indicated on Plans, present obstructions to grade and
alignment of proposed improvements immediately notify engineer, who without
delay, will determine if existing utilities are to be relocated, or grade and alignment
of proposed improvements changed. Where necessary to move existing services,
poles, guy wires, pipelines, etc., as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will
make arrangements with the owner of the utility to be moved and have it moved.
The costs of any utility relocations will be at the Contractor's sole expense. Owner
will not be liable for relocations costs or damages on account of delays due to
changes made by owners of privately owned utilities which hinder progress of the
work.
02 -12 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
All construction staking required to complete the work associated with this contract
shall be provided by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be responsible for
determining the layout and extent of staking necessary to construct the improvements
to the lines and grades shown in the Plans. This item shall not be paid for separately
and shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items.
SECTION 03- TRAFFIC CONTROL
Access shall be provided for residents and emergency vehicles at all times. When
it becomes necessary to restrict access, the Contractor shall notify all applicable
agencies (ie. Fire Department, E.M.S., Public Works, etc.). At the end of each day
two lanes of traffic shall be opened to the public. The Contractor shall be responsible
for all maintenance, signing and safety precautions necessary for traffic control. This
item shall be considered subsidiary to other bid items and no additional
compensation shall be given for complying with this Special Condition.
SECTION 04- WARRANTY BOND
Per City of Round Rock Ordinances, a two (2) year Warranty Bond naming the City
of Round Rock as obligee will be required for public streets constructed without time
stabilization of subgrade material when the Plasticity Index of the subgrade is above
24. Warranty Bond shall remain in effect for two (2) years from date of City of
Round Rock acceptance of improvements. Such bonds shall be from an approved
surety company holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety or other
surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner prior to final payment.
specond.msUspecs
A one (1) year Warranty Bond in the amount of one hundred (100 %) percent of the
SC -5
contract price will be required for all other improvements and shall be submitted
prior to final payment. Such bonds shall be from an approved surety company
holding a permit from the State of Texas to act as surety (and acceptable according
to the latest list of companies holding certificates of authority from the Security of
the Treasury of the United States) or other surety or sureties acceptable to the Owner
prior to final payment.
SECTION 05 INSURANCE
Section 3.18 of the General Conditions of the Agreement is hereby amended to
include the following:
specond.mstlspecs
3.18 Insurance
Contractor shall carry insurance in the following types and amounts for the duration
of this Contract, which shall include items owned by Owner in care, custody and
control of Contractor prior and during construction and warranty period, and furnish
Certificates of Insurance along with copies of policy declaration pages and all policy
endorsements as evidence thereof:
a. Statutory Worker's Compensation and minimum $100,000 Employers
Liability Insurance.
b. Commercial General Liability Insurance with minimum limits of $500,000
per occurrence and $1,000,000 Aggregate or $500,000 for this designated
project and $100,000 Fire Damage.
c. Automobile Liability Insurance for all owned, nonowned and hired vehicles
with minimum limits for Bodily Injury of $250,000 for each person and
$500,000 for each occurrence and Property Damage limits of $100,000 or
Combined Single Limit of $600,000.
d. On all new or remodeling building proiects: All Risk Builders Risk Insurance
for insurable building projects shall be insured in the amount of the contract
price for such improvements. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against
each other for damages caused by fire or other perils to the extent covered
by Builders Risk Insurance required under this section, except as to such
rights as they may have in the proceeds of such insurance. Contractor shall
require similar waivers by Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors.
e. Owner and Contractor's Protective Policy. The Contractor shall provide and
maintain during the life of this contract and until all work under said contract
has been completed and accepted by the Owner, an Owner's and Contractor's
SC -6
specond.msuspecs
Protective Policy which co- insures the Owner and the Owner's agents and
employees with the same Commercial General Liability coverage as
described above, entitled "Commercial General Liability Insurance."
When offsite storage is permitted, policy will be endorsed for 'transit and off site
storage in amounts sufficient to protect property being transported or stored.
This insurance shall include, as insured, City of Round Rock, Contractor,
Subcontractors and Sub - subcontractors in the work, as their respective interest may
appear.
If insurance policies are not written for amount specified in b, and c. above,
Contractor is required to carry an Excess Liability Insurance Policy for any
difference in amounts specified.
Contractor shall be responsible for deductibles and self insured retentions, if any,
stated in policies. Any self insured retention shall not exceed ten percent of
minimum required limits. All deductibles or self insured retentions shall be disclosed
on Certificate of Insurance required above.
Contractor shall not commence work at site under this Contract until he has obtained
required insurance and until such insurance has been reviewed by Owner's Contract
Administration Office. Contractor shall not allow any Subcontractors to commence
work until insurance required has been obtained and approved. Approval of
insurance by Owner shall not relieve or decrease liability of Contractor hereunder.
Insurance to be written by a company licensed to do business in the State of Texas
at the time policy is issued and acceptable to owner.
Contractor shall produce an endorsement to each effected policy:
1. Naming City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas
78664 as additional insured (except Workers' Compensation and Builders
Risk).
2. That obligates the insurance company to notify Joanne Land, City Secretary,
City of Round Rock, 221 East Main Street, Round Rock, Texas 78664 of any
and all changes to policy 30 days prior to change.
3. That the "other" insurance clause shall not apply to Owner where City of
Round Rock is an additional insured shown on policy. It is intended that
policies required in this agreement, covering both Owner and Contractor,
shall be considered primary coverage as applicable.
Contractor shall not cause any insurance to be canceled nor permit any insurance to
SC -7
specond.msUspecs
lapse during term of this Contract or as required in the Contract.
If Contractor is underwritten on a claim -made basis, the retroactive date shall be prior
to, or coincident with, the date of this Contract and the Certificate of Insurance shall
state that coverage is claims made and also the retroactive date. Contractor shall
maintain coverage for duration of this Contract and for two years following
completion of this Contract.
Contractor shall provide the City annually a Certificate of Insurance as evidence of
such insurance. It is further agreed that Contractor shall provide Owner a 30 day
notice of aggregate erosion, an advance of the retroactive date, cancellation and/or
renewal.
It is also agreed that Contractor will invoke the tail option at request of Owner and
the Extended Reporting Period (ERP) premium shall be paid by Contractor.
Owner reserves the right to review insurance requirements of this section during
effective period of the Contract and to make reasonable adjustments to insurance
coverages and their limits when deemed necessary and prudent by Owner based upon
changes in statutory law, court decisions or the claims history of the industry as well
as Contractor.
Owner shall be entitled, upon request, and without expense, to receive copies of
policies and all endorsements thereto and may make any reasonable requests for
deletion or revision or modification of particular policy terms, conditions, limitations
or exclusions, except where policy provisions are established by law or regulation
binding upon either of the parties hereto or the underwriter on any of such policies.
Actual losses not covered by insurance as required by the section shall be paid by
Contractor.
SC -8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SECTION 06- WAGE RATES
GENERAL DECISION TX960043 03/15/96 TX43
General Decision Number TX960043
Superseded General Decision No. TX950043
State: TEXAS
Construction Type:
HEAVY
HIGHWAY
County(ies):
BELL CORYELL TRAVIS
BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON
BRAZOS HAYS
COMAL MCLENNAN
Heavy (excluding tunnels and dams) and Highway Construction Projects (does not include building
structures in rest area projects). *NOT TO BE USED FOR WORK ON SEWAGE OR WATER
TREATMENT PLANTS OR LIFT/PUMP STATIONS IN BELL, CORYELL, MCLENNAN AND
WILLIAMSON COUNTIES.
Modification Number
0
COUNTY(ies):
BELL CORYELL TRAVIS
BEXAR GUADALUPE WILLIAMSON
BRAZOS HAYS
COMAL MCLENNAN
SUTX2042A 11/16/1991
Rates Fringes
AIR TOOL OPERATOR 6.500
ASPHALT HEATER OPERATOR 6.500
ASPHALT RAKER 7.011
ASPHALT SHOVELER 6.550
BATCHING PLANT WEIGHER 8.173
BATTERBOUARD SETTER 7.700
CARPENTER 9.054
CONCRETE FINISHER- PAVING 8.600
specond.mst/specs
Publication Date
03/15/1996
SC -9
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONCRETE FINISHER - STRUCTURES 7.903
CONCRETE RUBBER 6.740
ELECTRICIAN 13.710
FLAGGER 5.150
FORM BUILDER - STRUCTURES 8.017
FORM LINER - PAVING & CURB 7.250
FORM SETTER - PAVING & CURB 7.683
FORM SETTER - STRUCTURES 7.928
LABORER- COMMON 6.078
LABORER- UTILITY 6.852
MECHANIC 10.774
OILER 9.389
SERVICER 7.280
PAINTER - STRUCTURES 10.000
PILEDRIVER 6.600
PIPE LAYER 7.229
BLASTER 9.067
ASPHALT DISTRIBUTOR OPERATOR 7.304
ASPHALT PAVING MACHINE 7.945
BROOM OR SWEEPER OPERATOR 7.117
BULLDOZER, 150 HP & LESS 8.125
BULLDOZER, OVER 150 HP 8.593
CONCRETE PAVING CURING MACHINE 7.633
CONCRETE PAVING FINISHING MACHINE 9.067
CONCRETE PAVING GANG VIBRATOR 7.250
CONCRETE PAVING SAW 6.200
SLIPPORM MACHINE OPERATOR 8.700
CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE,
DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL
LESS THAN 1 1/2 C.Y. 8.427
CRANE, CLAMSHELL, BACKHOE,
DERRICK, DRAGLINE, SHOVEL
1 'h C.Y. &:OVER 9.880
FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR.
CRAWLER MOUNTED 10.475
FOUNDATION DRILL OPERATOR 10.923
TRUCK MOUNTED
FRONT END LOADER 2 1/2 C.Y. & LESS 7.499
FRONT END LOADER OVER 2 1/2 C.Y. 8.255
HOIST - DOUBLE DRUM 10.750
MOTOR GRADER OPERATOR 9.657
PAVEMENT MARKING MACHINE 6.078
PLANER OPERATOR 7.250
specond.msVspecs
SC -10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL PLANT -MIX
PAVEMENTS 7.083
ROLLER, STEEL WHEEL OTHER
FLATWHEEL OR TAMPING 6.403
ROLLER, PNEUMATIC, SELF PROPELLED 6.433
SCRAPER -17 C.Y. & LESS 7.245
SCRAPER -OVER 17 C.Y. 7.495
SELF PROPELLED HAMMER OPERATOR 6.078
SIDE BOOM 9.000
TRACTOR - CRAWLER TYPE 7.539
TRACTOR - PNEUMATIC 6.707
TRENCHING MACHINE 6.850
WAGON - DRILL/BORING MACHINE/POST
HOLE DRILLER OPERATOR 6.926
REINFORCING STEEL SETTER PAVING 8.158
REINFORCING STEEL SETTER
STRUCTURES 9.062
STEEL WORKER- STRUCTURAL 9.242
SIGN ERECTOR 8.640
SPREADER BOX OPERATOR 6.541
BARRICADE SERVICER WORK ZONE 6.078
MOUNTED SIGN INSTALLER PERMANENT
GROUND 6.078
TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE LIGHT 6.493
TRUCK DRIVER - SINGLE AXLE HEAVY 6.674
TRUCK DRIVER - TANDEM AXLE SEMI-
TRAILER 6.824
TRUCK DRIVER - LOWBOY/FLOAT 8.041
TRUCK DRIVER - TRANSIT MIX 6.078
WELDER 8.824
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included, within the scope of the classifications listed
may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29 CFR 5.5 (a) (1)
(v)).
In the listing above, the "SU" designation means that rates listed under that identifier do not reflect
collectively. bargained wage and fringe benefit rates. Other designations indicate unions whose rates
have been determined to be prevailing.
specond.msUspec
END OF GENERAL DECISION
SC -11
CLASSIFICATION
Rate
Health
Pension
Vacation
Total
Wage
ASBESTOS WORKER
$8.78
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$8.78
CARPENTER
$15.52
$1.57
$0.97
$0.00
$18.06
CARPET LAYER/FLOORING INSTALLER
$8.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$8.00
CONCRETE FINISHER
$10.27
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$10.27
DATA COMMUNICATION/TELECOM
INSTALLER
$12.08
$0.76
$0.50
$0.05
$13.39
DRYWALL INSTALLER/CEILING
INSTALLER
$10.91
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$10.91
ELECTRICIAN
$17.44
$2.16
$1.05
$1.05
$21.70
ELEVATOR MECHANIC
$16.75
$3.85
$2.19
$1.50
$24.29
FIRE PROOFING INSTALLER
$8.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$8.00
GLAZIER
$13.60
$2.24
$1.15
$0.54
$17.53
HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$10.56
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$10.56
INSULATOR
$13.75
$1.16
$0.92
$0.03
$15.86
IRON WORKER
$12.18
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$12.18
LABORER/HELPER
$7.48
$0.02
$0.00
$0.00
$7.50
LATHER/PLASTERER
$12.50
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$12.50
LIGHT EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
$7.75
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$7.75
MASON
$16.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$16.00
METAL BUILDING ASSEMBLER
$11.00
$0.62
$0.00
$0.34
$11.96
MILLWRIGHT
$15.91
$1.63
$1.00
$0.00
$18.54
PAINTER/WALL COVERING INSTALLER
$8.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$8.00
PIPEFITTER
$18.10
$1.42
$1.80
$0.00
$21.32
PLUMBER
$12.68
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$12.68
ROOFER
$10.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$10.00
SHEET METAL WORKER
$18.40
$2.39
$2.55
$0.33
$23.67
SPRINKLER FITTER
$18.25
$3.40
$2.20
$0.00
$23.85
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
;OUNTY NAME WILLIAMSON
997
spemnd.mst/specs
PREVAILING WAGE RATE DETERMINATION
BUILDING CONSTRUCTION TRADES
SC -12
Date Printed: April 15,
TERRAZZO WORKER
$0.00*
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00*
TILE SETTER
$15.00
$0.32
$0.00
$0.00
$15.32
WATERPROOFER/CAULKER
$10.64
$0.00
$0.00
$0.00
$10.64
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
$0.00 in the rate field indicated insufficient data was received to determine a prevailing wage rate for this
lassification. Government Code Title 10, Sec. 2258.023, paragraph C state: "A contractor or subcontractor does
of violate this section if a public body awarding a contract does not determine the prevailing wage rates and
Decify the rates in the contract as provided in Section 2258.022.
'roperty of General Services Commission, Based on 1996 Survey results)
,econd.mst/specs
SC -13
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.01 SCOPE OF WORK
The work covered by these Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, equipment,
appliances, materials and performing all operations in connection with the inspection
and testing, complete in accordance with the Plans, and subject to the terms and
conditions of the Contract Documents.
1.02 GOVERNING TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE: The item number designation shown in parentheses adjacent to captions
herein is a reference to City of Austin Standard Specifications.
STREET. WATER. SEWER AND DRAINAGE IMPROVEMENTS
The current City of Austin Standard Specifications as adopted and amended by the
City of Round Rock and the current City of Austin Erosion and Sedimentation
Control Manual are hereby referred to and included in this contract as fully and to the
same extent as if copied at length herein and they shall be applied to this project
except as modified in these Specifications and on the Plans.
Wherever the term "City of Austin" is used in the Austin Specifications, it shall be
construed to mean the City of Round Rock.
Wherever the term "Engineer" is used in the Austin Specifications, it shall be
construed to mean the City of Round Rock.
ITEM 2 CONTROL OF WORK
2.01 CLEAN -UP
2.01.1 CONSTRUCTION SITE
During construction the Contractor shall keep the site free and clean from all rubbish
and debris and shall clean-up the site promptly when notified to do so by the
Engineer.
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, maintain the streets and roads free from
dust, mud, excess earth or debris which constitutes a nuisance or danger to the public
using the thoroughfare, or the occupants of adjacent properties.
Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on streets and roads over which hauling is
techspec.mstIspec.mesrer
TS -2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2.01.2 BACKWORK
2.02 GRADING
techspec. mst/spec.master
done, and any such spillage or debris deposited on streets, due to the Contractor's
operations, shall be immediately removed.
The Contractor shall coordinate his operations in such a manner as to prevent the
amount of clean-up and completion of back works from becoming excessive. Should
such a condition exist, the Engineer may order all or portions of the work to cease
and refuse to allow any work to commence until the back work is done to the
Engineer's satisfaction.
The Contractor shall do such grading in and adjacent to the construction area
associated with this contract as may be necessary to leave such areas in a neat and
satisfactory condition approved by the Engineer.
ITEM 3 EXAMINATION AND REVIEW
3.01 EXAMINATION OF WORK
The work covered under this Contract shall be examined and reviewed by the
Engineer, representatives of all governmental entities which have jurisdiction, and
the Owner's authorized representative. The quality of material and the quality of
installation of the improvements shall be to the satisfaction of the Engineer. It shall
be the Contractor's responsibility for the construction methods and safety precautions
in the undertaking of this Contract.
3.02 NOTIFICATION
The Engineer and Owner must be notified a minimum of 24 -hours in advance of
beginning construction, testing, or requiring presence of the Engineer, project
representative, or Owner's representative.
3.03 CONSTRUCTION STAKING
The Engineer shall furnish the Contractor reference points and benchmarks that, in
the Engineer's opinion, provide sufficient information for the Contractor to perform
construction staking.
3.04 PROTECTION OF STAKES, MARKS, ETC.
All engineering and surveyor's stakes, marks, property comers, etc., shall be carefully
TS -3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM 4 PROTECTION AND PRECAUTION
4.01 WORK IN FREEZING WEATHER
Portions of the work may continue as directed by the Engineer.
4.02 PROTECTION OF TREES. PLANTS AND SHRUBS
The Contractor shall take necessary precautions to preserve all existing trees, plants
and shrubs but where it is justifiable and necessary the Contractor may remove trees
and plants for construction right -of -way but only with approval of the Engineer.
4.03 TRAFFIC CONTROL MEASURES AND BARRICADES
Traffic control measures and barricades shall be installed in accordance with the
Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices and in other locations deemed
necessary by the Engineer, for the protection life and property. Under no
circumstances will any existing road be permitted to remain closed over a weekend.
Costs for providing all traffic control measures shall be lump sum paid monthly as
work progresses.
4.04 PROPERTY LINES AND MONUMENTS
The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection, reference and resetting of
property corner monuments if disturbed.
4.05 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS MATERIAL
The Contractor shall at his own expense, make arrangement for the disposal of
surplus material, such as rock, trees, brush and other unwanted backfill materials.
4.06 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF PREMISES
The Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide additional space as necessary for
his operations and storage of materials.
techspec.mst/spec.master
preserved by the Contractor, and in case of destruction or removal during the course
of this project, such stakes, marks, property comers, etc., shall be replaced by the
Contractor at the Contractor's sole expense.
TS -4
ITEM 5 MATERIALS
5.01 TRADE NAMES
Except as specified otherwise, wherever in the specifications an article or class of
material is designated by a trade name or by the name or catalog number of any
maker, patentee, manufacturer, or dealer, such designations shall be taken as
intending to mean and specify the articles described or another equal thereto in
quality, finish, and serviceability for the purpose intended, as may be determined and
judged by the Engineer in his sole discretion.
5.02 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP
No material which has been used by the Contractor for any temporary purpose
whatever is to be incorporated in the permanent structure without the written consent
of the Engineer. Where materials or equipment are specified by a trade or brand
name, it is not the intention of the owner to discriminate against an equal product of
another manufacturer, but rather to set a definite standard of quality for performance,
and to establish an equal basis for the evaluation of bids. Where the words
"equivalent ", "proper" or' "equal to are used, they shall be understood to mean that
the item referred to shall be "proper ", the "equivalent" of, or "equal to" some other
item, in the opinion or judgement of the Engineer. Unless otherwise specified, all
materials shall be the best of their respective kinds and shall be in all cases fully
equal to approved samples. Notwithstanding that the words "or equal to" or other
such expressions may be used in the specifications in connection with a material,
manufactured article or process, the material, article or process specifically
designated shall be used, unless a substitute is approved in writing by the Engineer,
and the Engineer will have the right to require the use of such specifically designated
material, article or process.
techspec.mstf spec.mazter
TS -5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7.0 PLANS, DETAILS AND NOTES
INDEX OF DRAWINGS
Cover Sheet C -1
General Notes C -2
Plan Layout C -3, C -8
Miscellaneous Details C -9
Traffic Control Details & Notes C- 10,C -14
Landscape Plan L-1
Landscape Details L-2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CITY STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SERIES 100 EARTHWORK
Edition
08/17/94 Item No. 104 Removing Concrete
SERIES 200 SUBGRADE AND BASE CONSTRUCTION
04/17/86 Item No. 230 Rolling (Flat Wheel)
SERIES 300 STREET SURFACE COURSES
04/17/86 Item No. 306 Prime Coat
08/23/96 Item No. 340 Hot Mix Asphalt Concrete Pavement
05/16/94 Item No. 375 Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps
SERIES 400 CONCRETE AND STRUCTURES
05/18/95 Item No. 403 Concrete for Structures
05/18/95 Item No. 405 Concrete Admixture
04/17/86 Item No. 406 Reinforcing Steel
08/17/92 Item No. 407 Fibrous Concrete
04/17/86 Item No. 408 Concrete Joint Materials
12/03/86 Item No. 409 Membrane Curing
05/18/95 Item No. 411 Surface Finish for Concrete
08/26/93 Item No. 432 Concrete Sidewalk
SERIES 600 ENVIRONMENTAL ENHANCEMENT
04/17/86 Item No. 601 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil
09/30/87 Item No. 604 Seeding for Erosion Control
05/16/97 Item No. 606 Fertilizer
08/25/95 Item No. 610 Preservation of Trees & Vegetations
04/17/86 Item No. 628 Sediment Containment Dike
05/01/90 Item No. 642 Silt Fence
SERIES 800 URBAN TRANSPORTATION
09/30/87 Item No. 803 Barricades, Signs, and Traffic Handling
SPECIAL SPECIFICATIONS
05/03/99 Item No. 2800 Irrigation
05/26/99 Item No. 2900 Landscape
ITEM NO. 104
REMOVING CONCRETE
104.1 Description
This item shall consist of breaking up, removing and satisfactorily disposing of existing concrete, as
classified, at locations indicated or as directed by the Engineer.
104.2 Classification
Existing concrete, when removed under this section, will be classified as follows:
1. Concrete Curb will include curb, curb and gutter and combinations thereof.
2. Concrete Slabs will include, but not be limited to, patio slabs, porch slabs, concrete riprap and
concrete pavement.
3. Sidewalks and Driveways will include concrete sidewalks and driveways.
4. Concrete Walls will include all walls regardless of height and wall footings.
5. Concrete Steps will include all steps and combinations of walls and steps.
6. Abandoned Foundations will include abandoned Electric Department foundations.
7. Miscellaneous Concrete shall include but not be limited to manholes, inlets, junction boxes and
headwalls.
104.3 Materials
(1) Mortar
Mortar shall conform to mortar in Item No. 510, "Pipe".
104.4 Construction Methods
Prior to commencing this work, all erosion control and tree protection measures required shall be in place
and all utilities located and protected as set forth in the "General Conditions ". The existing concrete shall
be broken up, removed to conform to Item No. 101, "Preparing Right of Way" and disposed of by the
Contractor and deposited at a permitted disposal site.
Where only a portion of the existing concrete is to be removed and that remaining will continue to serve in
its purpose, care shall be exercised to avoid damage to that portion to remain in place. The existing
concrete shall be cut to the neat lines when indicated or as established by the Engineer, by sawing with an
appropriate type circular concrete saw to a minimum depth of 1n inch. Any reinforcing steel encountered
shall be cut off 1 inch inside of concrete sawed line. Any existing concrete which is damaged or destroyed
beyond the neat lines so established shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense. Remaining concrete
shall be mortared to protect the reinforcing steel and provide a neat clean appearance.
104 8/17/94 Page 1 Removing Concrete
d. After water has drained from planting, but not more than 24 hours later, Contractor to
apply pre - emergent weed control according to manufacturers specifications.
e. Following pre - emergent weed control applications, Contractor to install specified
mulch to full 2" depth over entire bed area.
3.04 CLEAN - UP
A. After all planting operations have been completed, remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant
containers and rubbish from the property. All scars ruts or other marks in the ground caused
by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout
the site. Contractor shall pick up all trash resulting from this work no less frequently than
each Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and /or the last working day of each week.
All trash shall be removed completely from the site.
B. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom -clean and shall wash down all paved areas
within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition. All walks shall be left in a
clean and safe condition.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. General:
B. Trees, Shrubs, Groundcover and Annuals:
2900 615199
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
c. After installation of all shrubs, groundcover and annuals, plantings shall be watered
thoroughly. Any settling of plants or finished grade that occurs shall be repaired prior
to installation of mulch. Finished grade of planting beds to be 1/2" below finished
grade of adjacent pavement or curb.
1. Maintain plant materials and lawn areas until final acceptance of the project.
2. Correct defective work as soon as apparent or as directed by Landscape Architect.
3. All debris (including clippings, leaves, etc.) shall be removed from project site.
2. Coordinate with irrigation contractor to ensure functional irrigation system. Notify
Landscape Architect should any conflicts arise. Hand water all areas that do not have
automatic irrigation system until fully established.
1. Maintenance shall include litter removal, watering, pruning, fertilizing, weeding and the
application of appropriate herbicides, insecticides, and fungicides as necessary.
Under no conditions shall shrubs be sheared (unless Contractor obtains written consent of
Owner).
2. Corrective measures - tighten and repair guying and staking work, reset settled plants,
remulch in order to maintain specified depths of mulch.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE
A. The landscape will be reviewed provided all work is in compliance with specifications and
drawings and all plants and lawns are in healthy vigorous condition. Inspection to detemline
Page 8 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 230
ROLLING (FLAT WHEEL)
230.1 Description
This item shall consist of the compaction of subgrade, embankment. flexible base, surface treatments and
asphalt surfaces by the operation of approved power rollers as herein specified and as directed by the
Engineer.
230.2 Equipment
(1) Embankments and Flexible Bases
Power rollers shall be of the 3- wheel, self - propelled type, weighing not less than 10 tons and shall
provide a compression on the rear wheels of not less than 325 pounds per linear inch of wheel
width. All wheels shall be flat. The rear wheels shall have a diameter of not less than 48 inches
and each shall have a wheel width of not less than 20 inches.
(2) Surface Treatments and Pavements
Power rollers shall be the 3 -wheel or tandem, self - propelled type, weighing not less than 3 tons
nor more than 6 tons. All wheels shall be flat. Rollers shall be equipped with an adequate scraping
or cleaning device on each wheel. Rollers used to compact asphalt mixture shall be equipped with
a water system which will keep all tires uniformly wet.
In lieu of the rolling equipment specified, the Contractor may, upon written permission from the
Engineer, operate other compacting equipment that will produce equivalent relative compaction in
the same period of time as the specified equipment. If the substituted compaction equipment fails
to produce the desired compaction within the same period of time as would be expected of the
specified equipment, as determined by the Engineer, its use shall be discontinued.
Rollers shall be maintained in good repair and operating condition and shall be approved by the
Engineer.
230.3 Construction Methods
(1) Subgrades, Embankments and Flexible Base
The subgrade or embankment layer or the base course shall be sprinkled if directed and rolling
with a power roller shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed towards the center,
overlapping on successive trips by at least '/ the width of the rear wheel of the power roller. On
superelevated curves, rolling shall begin at the low sides and progress toward the high sides.
Altemate trips of the roller shall be slightly different in length. The rollers, unless otherwise
directed, shall be operated•at a speed between 2 and 3 miles per hour.
1 230 4117186 Page 1 Rolling (Flat Wheel)
•
(2) Surface Treatments and Pavements
Rolling shall be done to produce a satisfactory surface as called for in surface treatment and
pavement items. The sequence of work shall be as indicated for embankment layer or base
course. The operating speed shall be determined by the Contractor.
0.4 Measurement and Payment
additional compensation will be made for materials. equipment or labor required by this item, but shall
considered subsidiary to the various items included in the contract.
30 4/17/86 Page 2 Rolling (Flat Wheel)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 306
PRIME COAT
306.1 Description
This item shall consist of an application of asphaltic material on the completed base course and /or other
approved areas in accordance with these specifications as directed by the Engineer.
306.2 Materials
(1) Asphalt Materials
The asphalt material for Prime Coat shall meet the requirements of Cutback Asphalt, MC -30,
Emulsion, MS -2, SS -1, Emulsion CSS -1 or AE -P, Item No. 301, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions ".
(2) Water
Water shall be furnished by the Contractor and shall be clean and free from industrial wastes and
other objectionable matter.
(3) Dispersal Agent
Agent shall be added to water and sprayed on surfaces to be primed in accordance with asphalt
manufacturer's recommendations.
306.3 Construction Methods
When, in the opinion of the Engineer, the base course or other surface is satisfactory to receive the prime
coat, the surface shall be cleaned by sweeping or other approved methods as directed by the Engineer.
The surface shall be lightly sprinkled with water just prior to application of the asphaltic material unless this
requirement is waived by the Engineer. The Contractor shall submit a list of prime material(s) recommend
to be applied on the work to the Engineer for approval. When emulsions are approved, a dispersal agent
shall be added to the water before sprinkling. The asphaltic material shall be applied on the clean surface
by an approved type of self - propelled pressure distributor operated so as to distribute the prime coat at a
rate ranging from 0.1 to 0.3 gallons per square yard of surface area. The material shall be evenly and
smoothly distributed. During the application of prime coat, care shall be taken to prevent splattering of
adjacent pavement, curb and gutters or structures. The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning
splattered areas.
Prime Coat shall not be applied when the air temperature is below 60 F and falling, but it may be applied
when the air temperature is above 50 F and rising; the air temperature being taken in the shade and away
from artificial heat. Asphaltic material shall not be placed when general weather conditions, in the opinion
of the Engineer, are not suitable.
306 4/17/86 Page 1 Prime Coat
distributor shall have been recently calibrated and the Engineer shall be fumished an accurate and
sfactory record of such calibration. After beginning the work, should the yield on the asphaltic material
died appear in error, the distributor shall be calibrated in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer before
seeding with the work.
Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of the surface until the work is accepted by the
fineer. No traffic, hauling or placement of any subsequent courses shall be permitted over the freshly
died prime coat.
storage tanks, piping, retorts, booster tanks and distributors used in storing or handling asphaltic
serial shall be kept clean and in good operating condition at all times and they shall be operated in such
canner that there will be no contamination of the asphaltic material with foreign material. It shall be the
oonsibility of the Contractor to provide and maintain in good working order a recording thermometer at
storage heating unit at all times.
a Engineer will approve the temperature of application based on the temperature- viscosity relationship
t will permit application of the asphalt within the limits recommended in Item No. 301, "Asphalts, Oils
I Emulsions ". The recommended range for the viscosity of the asphalt is 100 to 125 centistokes. The
itractor shall apply the asphalt at a temperature within 15 F of the temperature specified in Item No.
, "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions ".
3.4 Measurement
ne coat will be considered subsidiary to Item No. 340, "Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement" unless
uded as a separate pay item in the contract. When included for payment. it shall be measured at point
delivery on the project in gallons at the applied temperature. The quantity to be paid for shall be the
nber of gallons used in the accepted prime coat.
5.5 Payment
work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item, when included as a contract pay
n, will be paid for at the unit price bid per gallon for "Prime Coat ", which price shall be full compensation
cleaning the base course or other surface, for furnishing, heating, hauling and distributing the prime
at specified; for all freight involved and for all manipulations, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals
:essary to complete the work.
yment, when included as a contract pay item, will be made under:
Pay Item No. 306: Prime Coat - Per Gallon.
d
4/17186 Page 2 Prime Coat
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 340
HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT
340.1 Description
This item shall govern for base, level -up, and surface courses composed of a compacted mixture of
aggregate and asphaltic cement mixed hot in a mixing plant. The hot mix asphaltic concrete pavement
shall be constructed on a previously completed and approved subgrade, base material, concrete slab or
existing pavement.
340.2 Materials
The Contractor shall fumish materials to meet the requirements specified herein and shall be solely
responsible for the quality and consistency of the product delivered to the Project.
(1) Aggregate: The aggregate shall be composed of course aggregate, a fine aggregate and, if
required or allowed, a mineral filler and may include reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP). RAP use
will be allowed in all mixtures except as specifically excluded herein or on the Drawings.
Aggregates shall meet the quality requirements of Table 1 and other requirements as specified
herein. The aggregate contained in RAP will not be required to meet Table 1 requirements unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings.
(a) Coarse Aggregate: Coarse aggregate is defined as that part of the aggregate retained on
the No. 10 sieve and shall consist of clean, tough, durable fragments of crushed stone or
crushed gravel of uniform quality throughout.
Gravel from each source shall be so crushed as to have a minimum of 85% of the particles
retained on the No. 4 sieve with two or more mechanically induced crushed faces as
determined by TxDOT Test Method TEX- 460 -A(Part I). The material passing the No. 4 sieve
and retained on the No. 10 sieve must be the product of crushing aggregate that was
originally retained on the No. 4 sieve.
(b) Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP): RAP is defined as a salvaged, milled, pulverized,
broken or crushed asphaltic pavement. The RAP to be used in the mix shall be crushed or
broken to the extent that 100 percent will pass the 2 inch sieve.
The stockpiled RAP shall not be contaminated by dirt or other objectionable materials. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings, stockpiled, crushed RAP must have either a decantation
of no more than 5 percent or a plasticity index of no more than 8, when tested in accordance
with TxDOT Test Method Tex - 406 -A, Part I, or Test Method Tex - 106 -E, respectively.
RAP will be permitted to be used in a surface course provided not more than 10% RAP is
used.
340 8/23/96 Page 1 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
MATERIAL
PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Passing the 3/8 inch sieve
100
Passing the No. 10 sieve
70 -100
Passing the No. 200 sieve
0 -15
(c) Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate is defined as that part of the aggregate passing the No. 10
sieve and shall be of uniform quality throughout. A maximum of 15 percent of the total
aggregate may be field sand or other uncrushed fine aggregate.
Screenings shall be supplied from sources whose coarse aggregate meets the abrasion and
magnesium sulfate soundness loss requirements shown in Table 1.
(1) Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, stone screenings are required and shall be the
product of a rock crushing operation and meet the following gradation requirements
when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Method Tex - 200 -F, Part I.
(2) Crushed gravel screenings may be used with, or in lieu of, stone screenings only when
shown on the Drawings. Crushed gravel screenings must be the product of crushing
aggregate that was originally retained on the No. 4 sieve and must meet the gradation for
stone screenings shown above.
(d) Mineral Filler: Mineral filler shall consist of thoroughly dried stone dust, portland cement, fly
ash, lime or other mineral dust approved by the Engineer. The mineral filler shall be free from
foreign matter.
Portland cement manufactured in a cement kiln fueled by hazardous waste as defined in 30
Texas Administrative Code, Section 335.1, shall be prohibited. This applies to any other
specification concerning the use of cement materials. Contractor shall maintain a record of
source for each batch. Supplier shall certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or
raw materials.
Fly ash obtained from a source using a process fueled by hazardous waste as defined in 30
Texas Administrative Code, Section 335.1, shall be prohibited. This applies to any other
specification concerning the use of fly ash. Contractor shall maintain a record of source for
each batch. Supplier shall certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw
materials.
The addition of baghouse fines or other collected fines will be permitted if the mixture quality
is not adversely affected in the opinion of the Engineer. In no case shall the amount of
material passing the No. 200 sieve exceed the tolerances of the job -mix formula or the
master gradation limits.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8/23/96 Page 2 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
TABLE 1
AGGREGATE QUALITY REQUIREMENTS •
Requirement I
Test Method I
Amount
COARSE AGGREGATE
Deleterious Material, percent, maximum
Tex - 217 -F, I
1.5
Decantation, percent, maximum
Tex- 217 -F, II
1.5
Los Angeles Abrasion, percent, maximum
Tex -410 -A
40
Magnesium Sulfate Soundness Loss 5 cycle,
percent, maximum
Tex -410 -A
30
FINE AGGREGATE
Linear Shrinkage, maximum
Tex - 107 -E, 11
3
COMBINED AGGREGATES
Sand Equivalent Value, minimum I Tex -203 -F
I 45
• - Aggregates, without added mineral filler or additives, combined as used in the job -mix formula (Plant
Corrected).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When tested by TEX-200 -F(Part I or Part III, as applicable), the mineral filler shall meet the
following gradation requirements. Baghouse fines are not required to meet the gradation
requirements.
(2) Asphaltic Material
(a) Paving Mixture. Asphalt cement for the paving mixture shall conform to the requirements of
Item 301, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions ", for AC -20 unless otherwise indicated in the Project
Documents.
340 8123196 Page 3 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
MATERIAL
PERCENT BY WEIGHT
Passing No. 30 inch sieve
95 -100
Passing No. 80 sieve, not less than
75
Passing No. 200 sieve, not less than
55
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
When tested by TEX-200 -F(Part I or Part III, as applicable), the mineral filler shall meet the
following gradation requirements. Baghouse fines are not required to meet the gradation
requirements.
(2) Asphaltic Material
(a) Paving Mixture. Asphalt cement for the paving mixture shall conform to the requirements of
Item 301, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions ", for AC -20 unless otherwise indicated in the Project
Documents.
340 8123196 Page 3 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
(b) RAP Paving Mixture. When more than 20 percent RAP is used in the produced mixture, the
asphalt in the RAP shall be restored to the properties indicated below. Restoration will be
made by adding asphalt recycling agent and/or virgin asphalt cement meeting the
requirements of Item 301, "Asphalts, Oils and Emulsions ".
The mixture design will include recovery of asphalt from the RAP in accordance with TxDOT
Test Method Tex - 211 -F. The recovered asphalt shall be blended in the laboratory with the
amount of asphalt cement and/or asphalt recycling agent selected for the Project. The
following test shall be performed on the laboratory blend by the producer of the asphaltic
concrete.
(1) Viscosity, 140 F, poises - Test Method Tex -528 -C
(2) Thin Film Oven Aging Test - Test Method Tex -510 -C
(3) Viscosity, 140 F, poises, on residue from the Thin Film Oven Aging Test -Test Method
Tex -528 -C
(4) Penetration at 77 F, 100 g, 5 sec, on residue from the Thin Film Oven Aging Test - Test
Method Tex -502 -C
The viscosity in poises equivalent to the residue penetration at 77 F shall be calculated as set
forth in TxDOT Test Method Tex - 535 -C. The viscosity index of the residue shall then be
calculated as follows:
Residue Viscosity Index
The aging index of the laboratory blended asphalt shall be determined as follows:
Aging Index
Residue Viscosity, poises,
equivalent to Penetration at 77 F
Residue Viscosity, 140 F poises
Residue Viscosity, 140 F, poises
Original Viscosity, 140 F poises
The laboratory blended asphalt shall meet the following requirements:
Residue Viscosity Index, maximum 1500
Aging Index, maximum 3.0
Samples of asphalt recovered from plant produced mixture shall show the asphalt to meet the
following requirements when tested in accordance with TxDOT Test Methods Tex -211 -F and
Tex - 502 -C:
Penetration, 77 F, 100 g, 5 sec - - 30 min. and 55 max.
(c) Tack Coat: Tack Coat shall conform to Item 307, "Tack Coat ".
8/23196 Page 4 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
•
1
1
�1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(3) Additives: Additives to facilitate mixing and/or improve the quality of the asphaltic mixture or tack
coat may be used with the authorization of the Engineer. The Contractor may choose to use
either lime or a liquid antistripping agent to reduce moisture susceptibility of the aggregate.
(4) Temporary Pavement Markings: Temporary pavement markings shall conform to Item 864,
'Abbreviated Pavement Markings ".
340.3 Paving Mixtures
An asphalt mixture design is a laboratory process which includes the determination of the quality and
quantity of the asphalt and the individual aggregates, and the testing of the combined mixture (Laboratory
Design).
The job mix formula (JMF) shall list the quantity of each component to be used in the mix after the
laboratory design has been adjusted by running it through a particular plant (Plant Corrected). The JMF will
be the standard to which the Acceptance Plan will be applied. The JMF of one drum or batching unit shall
not be used for another unit.
The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer on forms provided by the Engineer, an asphalt mixture design
reviewed, signed and sealed by a Texas Registered Professional Engineer or certified by a TxDOT Level II
Certified Asphalt Technician. The asphalt mixture design shall be submitted every two (2) years. Mix
designs older than one year will not be accepted without a review of current test data of the proposed
materials to ensure that the materials meet specification requirements.
The JMF (Plant Corrected) shall be submitted to the Engineer on a form provided by the Engineer through
the Inspector of the Project for review, for each individual Project, a minimum of three (3) working days
before the mixture is to be placed. Under no circumstances will a mixture be placed before its use is
reviewed by the Engineer.
Performance of the mix design shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor.
•
(1) Mixture Design: The mix shall be designed in TxDOT Construction Bulletin C -14 and Test
Method Tex -204 -F to conform with the requirements herein. The master grading limits of the
appropriate type and the JMF will be plotted on a_graduated chart with sieve sizes raised to the
0.45 power and be submitted to the Engineer with the asphalt mixture design.
The Bulk Specific Gravity of aggregates in RAP will be determined on extracted aggregates.
(2) Types: The blend of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, and mineral filler, if allowed, shall conform
to the master gradation shown in Table 2 for the type of mixture specified in conformance to
TxDOT Test Method Tex - 200 -F, Dry Sieve Analysis. The voids in the mineral aggregate (VMA)
will be determined as a mixture design requirement only, in accordance with TxDOT Test Method
Tex - 207 -F, and shall not be less than the value indicated in Table 2.
340 8/23/96 Page 5 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
TABLE 2
Master Grading
Percent Passing by Weight or Volume
Type
Seve Size
A
Coarse
Base
B
Fine
Base
C
Coarse
Surface
D
Fine
Surface
F
Fine
Mixture
1 /
100
I y."
95 -100
I"
100
7/8"
70 -90
95 -100
100
3/8"
75 -95
95 -100
/
50 -70
100
3 /8"
60 -80
70 -85
85 -100
100
Y"
95 -100
No.4
30 -50
40 -60
43 -63
50 -70
No 10
20 -34
27-40
30-40
32-42
32 -42
No. 40
5 -20
10 -25
10 -25
11 -26
9 -24
No. 80
2 -12
3 -13
3 -13
4 -14
3 -13
No.200
1 -6"
1 -6*
1 -6"
1 -6"
1 -6"
VMA % minimum
11
12
13
14
15
Rec. Min. Lift
3"
2"
13/4"
1"
'/+"
2 - 8 when Test Method Tex - 200 -F, Part 11 (Washed Sieve Analysis) is used.
8/23/96 Page 6 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SIEVES
PERCENT BY WEIGHT
LABORATORY
±5.0
No. 40 through No. 200 Sieve
OPTIMUM
DENSITY ( %)
±0.5
LABORATORY
DENSITY ( %)
Min.
Max.
STABILITY
Local Streets Surface Courses
96
94.5
97.5
35 Min.
Collectors & Arterials Surface Courses
96
94.5
97.5
40 - 55
All Base Courses
96
94.5
97.5
35 Min.
•
SIEVES
PERCENT BY WEIGHT
2" Sieve through No. 10 Sieve
±5.0
No. 40 through No. 200 Sieve
± 3.0
Asphalt Content
±0.5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(3)
Tolerances: Fluctuations in the gradation and asphalt content of the Job Mix Formula shall not
vary by more than the following but shall be limited to the range of the master gradation as
determined by TEX- 210 -F.
(4) Stability and Density: The mixture shall be designed at or near optimum density as indicated.
The laboratory mixture shall be molded in accordance with TxDOT Test Method TEX -206 -F and
the Bulk Specific Gravity determined in accordance with TxDOT Test Method TEX -207 -F with the
following percent of Maximum Theoretical Density as measured by TxDOT Test Method TEX -227-
F and Stability conforming to TxDOT Test Method TEX- 208 -F:
(5) Job Mix Formula Field Adjustments: The Contractor shall produce a mixture of uniform
composition closely conforming to the reviewed JMF within the limits of the tolerances given
above and the Acceptance Plan.
If it is determined by the City's laboratory that adjustments to the JMF are necessary to achieve
the specified requirements, the Engineer may allow adjustments of the JMF within the following
limits without a laboratory redesign of the mixture. The adjusted JMF shall not exceed the master
grading for the type of mixture specified nor shall the adjustments exceed 5 percent on any one
sieve, % inch size and larger, or 3 percent on the sieve size below the % inch sieve of the JMF
(Plant Corrected) reviewed for the Project.
When the considered adjustments exceed either the 5 or 3 percent limits, and the Engineer
determines that the impact of these changes may adversely affect pavement performance, a new
laboratory mixture design will be required.
340 8/23/96 Page 7 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
The asphalt content may be adjusted as concurred by the Engineer to maintain desirable
laboratory density near the optimum value while achieving other mix requirements. However,
increasing the asphalt content of the mixture in order to reduce pavement air voids will not be
allowed. Also, if the percent air voids is determined to be less than 4 percent, adjustments shall
be made to the plant production by the Contractor, within the tolerances as outlined above so that
an adequate air void level results.
4 Equipment
quipment used for the production, placement and compaction of the mixture shall be maintained in
I repair and operating conditions to the satisfaction of the Engineer. All equipment shall be made
able for inspection. Any equipment shall not be used until it is repaired to the satisfaction of the
neer.
(1) Mixing Plants: Plants may be of the weigh -batch or drum -mix type equipped with suitable
material conveyers, aggregate proportioning devices, dryers, bins, dust collectors and sensing
and recording devices as appropriate for the mixing plant type.
(2) Spreading and Finishing Paving Machine: The paving machine shall be self - propelled and
equipped with a heated screed capable of producing a finish surface meeting the requirements of
the street cross - section specified on the Drawings and all surface tests. Extensions to the screed
shall have the same heating and vibratory capabilities as the primary unit. The paving machine
shall be equipped with an automatic dual longitudinal screed control system and a transverse
screed control system. The longitudinal controls shall be capable of operating from any
longitudinal grade reference including a stringline, ski, mobil stringline or matching shoe. Unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings, the Contractor may use any one of these grade references.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor and equipment required for grade reference.
Rollers: The Contractor shall select rollers conforming to Item 230, "Rolling (Flat Wheel)" and
Item 232, "Rolling (Pneumatic Tire) ". Rollers not conforming to these requirements shall be
immediately removed from the Project.
(4) Motor Grader: A self - propelled motor grader may be used only when its use is approved by the
Engineer. It shall have a blade of not less than 12 feet and a wheelbase of not less than 16 feet.
Smaller graders may be used Mr small irregular areas when approved by the Engineer.
Material Transfer Equipment: Equipment to transfer mixture from the hauling units or the
roadbed to the spreading and finishing machine will be allowed unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
(3)
(5)
Windrow pick -up equipment, if permitted, shall be constructed in such a manner that substantially
all of the mixture deposited on the roadbed is picked up and loaded into the spreading and
finishing machine. The loading equipment shall be designed so that it does not interfere with the
spreading and finishing machine in obtaining the required line, grade and surface without
resorting to hand finishing.
(6) Straightedge: The Contractor shall provide a ten foot straightedge acceptable to the Engineer for
surface testing.
13/23/96 Page 8 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
340.5 Stockpiling Aggregates
Aggregates shall be stockpiled to facilitate blending. If the aggregate is not stockpiled on a hard, non -
contaminant base, the bottom six inch layer of the stockpiles shall not be used. Where space is limited,
stockpiles shall be separated by walls or other appropriate barriers. Aggregate, shall be stockpiled and
protected from the weather a minimum of 24 hours prior to use to minimize free moisture content. When
stockpiles are too large to protect from the weather, accurate and continuous means acceptable to the
Engineer shall be provided to monitor aggregate moisture. Aggregates shall be stockpiled and handled
such that segregation and contamination are minimized. No stockpile shall contain aggregate, including
RAP, from more than one source.
340.6 Mixture Temperature
The Contractor shall select a target temperature for discharge from the mixer between 250 F and 350 F for
the mixture suitable to weather and Project conditions. The target temperature shall be reported to the
Engineer daily and recorded in the Daily Progress Report. The mixture temperature shall not vary by more
than 25 F from the target temperature upon discharge from the mixer. No mixture cooler than 50 F from
target temperature shall be accepted or placed on the Project.
340.7 Mixture Storage
A surge- storage system may be used to minimize production interruptions during the normal day's
operations. When approved by the Engineer, ovemight storage in insulated storage bins may be used
provided that material temperature and physical properties are not adversely affected. Mixtures with
hardened lumps shall not be used. Stored mixtures shall not be exempt of any requirements provided in
this specification.
When a surge- storage system is used, it shall be equipped with a device such as a gob hopper or other
device approved by the Engineer to prevent segregation in the surge- storage bin.
340.8 Mixture Moisture Content
Mixture produced from any plant shall not have a moisture content in excess of percent by weight when
discharged from the mixer. The moisture content shall be determined in accordance with TxDOT Test
Method Tex - 212 -F, Part II, except that the sample shall be left in the oven a total of not less than four (4)
hours.
340.9 Construction Methods
(1) General: The Contractor shall be responsible for the production, transportation, placement and
compaction of the specified paving mixture to the requirements of this specification. The
Contractor shall also be responsible for providing a safe environment for inspection personnel to
inspect the equipment and to take samples.
340 8!23/96 Page 9 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
Any material delivered to the Project that by visual inspection can reasonably be expected not to
meet specification requirements (i.e. segregated or burned material, deficient or excess asphalt,
low mixing temperature, visible contaminants, etc.), as determined by the Engineer, shall not be
used or left in place.
Equipment shall be inspected prior to use and, if found to be defective or in an operating condition
that could potentially affect the quality of the finished pavement, as determined by the Engineer,
its use shall not be allowed. Leakage of fuels, oils, grease, hydraulic or brake fluids or other
contaminants onto the prepared surface or newly -laid mat will not be allowed.
The paving mixture, when placed with a spreading and finishing machine, shall not be placed
when the air temperature is below 50 F and is falling, but it may be placed when the air
temperature is above 40 F and rising. The paving mixture, when used as a level -up course or
when placed with a motor grader, shall not be placed when the air temperature is below 60 F and
is falling, but it may be placed when the air temperature is 50 F and rising. Mat thickness of 1'h
inches and less shall not be placed when the temperature of the surface on which the mat is to be
placed is below 50 F. The temperature shall be taken in a shaded area away from artificial heat.
Surfaces to be paved shall be finished, primed, cured, broomed and tacked, as appropriate, to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. If the surface on which the first course of the paving mixture is to be
placed is a flexible base course, and a cut -back asphalt is to be used as a prime coat, the flexible
base shall have been primed and cured a minimum of 24 hours before the paving mixture may be
placed. The 24 hour restriction will not apply to a flexible base that has been primed with material
other than a cut -back. However, the surface on which the tack coat and /or paving mixture is to be
placed shall be in a dry condition.
Pavement shall be opened to traffic as soon as possible after temporary pavement markings or
permanent markings are in place as indicated or as directed by the Engineer. Construction traffic
allowed on pavements open to the public will be subject to all laws governing traffic on streets and
highways.
(2) Tack Coat: The surface upon which the tack is to be placed shall be cleaned thoroughly to the
satisfaction of the Engineer. The surface shall be given a uniform application of tack coat as
governed by Item 307, "Tack Coat". The tack coat shall be applied with an approved sprayer at a
rate not to exceed 0.05 gallons per square yard. Where the paving mixture will adhere to the
surface on which it is to be placed without the use of a tack coat, the tack coat may be eliminated
by the Engineer. All contact surfaces of curbs, castings and structures shall be painted with a thin
uniform application of tack coat.
Whenever cut -back asphalts are used as a tack coat, the tack coat shall be rolled with a
pneumatic roller.
During the application of tack coat, care shall be taken to prevent splattering of adjacent
pavement, curb and gutter and structures. All splatter shall be removed by the Contractor at his
expense before the Work can be accepted.
Transporting Asphaltic Concrete: The asphaltic mixture shall be hauled to the Work site in tight
vehicles previously cleaned of all foreign material. In cool weather or for long hauls, covering of
the truck bodies is required.
(3)
8/23196 Page 10 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(4) Placing: Placing of the asphaltic mixture shall be done without tearing, shoving, gouging or
segregating the mixture and without producing streaks in the mat. Unloading into the finishing
machine shall be controlled so that bouncing or jarring the spreading and finishing machine shall
not occur and the required lines and grades shall be obtained without resorting to hand finishing
except as permitted below in this Section.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, dumping of the asphaltic material in a windrow and
then placing the mixture in the finishing machine with windrow pick -up equipment will be permitted
provided the temperature of the asphaltic mixture does not drop more than 50 F below the target
temperature before being placed by the finishing machine.
Under no circumstances will the asphaltic material be permitted to be dumped on or near the job
site and then reloaded for hauling to the site of placement. Exceptions may be allowed if approved
by the Engineer.
When approved by the Engineer, level -up courses may be spread with a motor grader meeting
the requirements of this specification.
The spreading and finishing machine shall be operated at a uniform forward speed consistent with
the plant production rate, hauling capability and roller train capacity to result in a continuous
operation. Stopping of the spreading and finishing machine between trucks is to be held to a
minimum. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, delivery of material is adversely affecting the mat
(excessive stopping of the spreading and finishing machine, loss of mixture temperature, etc.), the
Engineer may require paving operations to cease until acceptable methods are provided to
minimize starting and stopping of the spreading and finishing machine.
The hopper gates of the spreading and finishing machine shall be adjusted to provide an
adequate and consistent flow of material. This shall result in enough material being delivered to
the augers so that they are operating approximately 85 percent of the time or more. The augers
shall provide means to supply adequate flow of material to the center of the paver. Augers shall
supply an adequate flow of material for the full width of the mat being placed. Augers should be
kept approximately one -half to three - quarters full of mixture at all times during the paving
operation.
When the asphaltic mixture is placed in a narrow strip along the edge of an existing pavement, or
used to level up small areas of an existing pavement or placed in small irregular areas where the
use of a finishing machine is not practical, the finishing machine may be eliminated when
permitted by the Engineer.
The paving material adjacent to castings and curb and gutter shall be finished uniformly high so
that when compacted, it will be slightly above but not more than 1/8 inch above the edge of the
casting or gutter lip.
Longitudinal joints in the mat shall be placed to coincide with lane lines. Transverse joints shall be
offset a minimum of five (5) Feet.
(5) Compacting: The pavement shall be compacted thoroughly and uniformly to obtain the
compaction and cross section meeting the requirements of the Drawings and specifications.
Regardless of the method used for compaction, all rolling for compaction shall cease before the
mixture drops below 175 F.
340 8123 /96 Page 11 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
Rolling with a pneumatic tire roller to seal the surface shall be provided. Rolling with a tandem or
other steel -wheel roller shall be provided if required to iron out any roller marks. Vibratory rollers
shall not be allowed in the vibrating mode on mats with a plan depth of less than 1'% inches.
0 Sampling and Testing
.sphalt mixture shall be tested daily at the Project site for conformance to specification requirements.
:ngineer shall determine sample locations based on the Contractor's anticipated production and the
m number method of TxDOT Test Method Tex - 225 -F. Each days anticipated production shall be
>ned into three (3) equal single -pass, sub -area lots. Each days sample locations shall be equally
wted over the three (3) sub - areas. If, due to the weather or plant malfunctions, the Contractor's daily
pated production is not made, the random locations will not be recalculated. Also, no more than one
on of the three (3) sub -areas is to be located in an irregular shaped area such as a cul-de -sac.
is otherwise approved by the Engineer, a minimum of three bag samples and three correlating cores
e obtained from each days production. Bag samples shall be taken during lay -down operations. The
iry sampling point for the bag samples shall be from the windrow if a windrow elevator is used. If a
ow elevator is not used, the sample shall be taken from the middle of the paving machine hopper.
will require stopping the paving machine in order for the Inspector to safely secure a sample by
ig into the hopper. Gradation, asphalt content and stability shall be reported for each of the bag
,les. The stability value reported for each of the bag samples shall be the average of three (3) tests
ag. Pavement thickness and density shall be determined by 6 -inch cores. One core shall be taken for
2,000 single -pass square yards with a minimum of three (3) cores for all projects. One core shall be
1 at the same station and pass sampled for each of the bag samples. For each day's placement,
ity of cores for which no corresponding bag samples were taken shall be determined by using the
age Maximum Theoretical Density of the day's three (3) bag samples or as may otherwise be
mined by the Engineer. The Engineer may alter, increase or waive the testing schedule to ensure
Trial and workmanship compliance with specification requirements. Acceptability of the completed
ment shall be based on the average of test results for the Project as defined in Article 340.11,
eptance Plan ".
otal areas of less than 500 square yards, a total of only two bag samples and two correlating cores will
btained. If the Contractor desires additional testing, it shall be at his entire expense.
n, in the opinion of the Engineer, test results appear unrepresentative, additional testing may be
orized. The retesting will be at the expense of the Contractor and the results of the retesting shall be
aged with the results of the original testing. If the results of retesting indicate that the original testing
erroneous, the original test results will be discarded. Pavements with low density results may be
.red; but, the pavement shall not receive any additional compactive effort.
as shall be taken by the City's laboratory within 48 hours of paving unless otherwise authorized by
ineer. Pavements that will not or can not be cored within 48 hours shall be closed to both public and
struction traffic.
8/23/96 Page 12 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
340.11 Acceptance Plan
For the purpose of the Acceptance Plan only, the "Project shall be defined as follows: The Project is the
quantity of each of the specified mixture types as determined by the Engineer before the paving operation
begins. Considerations for defining the Project shall include paving operation staged due to traffic
considerations, changes to the Job Mix Formula, phasing of large projects, or other factors affecting the
consistency in the production, lay -down /compaction, use of completed portions, and /or aging of in -place
material. Acceptability of the completed pavement shall be based on the average of a minimum of three
tests per Project for each of the mixture types specified.
Pay adjustments for two or more acceptance factors shall be accumulative. Pay adjustments of 100% unit
price reduction shall require removal and replacement of the Work. Replacement materials shall be subject
to all requirements of this specification. Alternatively, the Engineer may allow the Work to remain in place
without payment provided that the Work is warranted for an extended period and under conditions as
determined by the Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to the removal and replacement of the Work
shall be the final authority.
(1) Non - Pay - Adjustment Acceptance Factors:
(a)
Surface Characteristics: Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, all pavements shall be
tested for smoothness. Surfaces shall be tested with a 10 foot straightedge parallel to the
roadway centerline and perpendicular to the centerline on flat, cross -slope sections.
Maximum allowable deviation in 10 feet shall be 1/8 inch parallel to the centerline and ''A inch
perpendicular to the centerline. Sections exceeding these maximums shall be corrected to
the satisfaction of the Engineer. The completed surface must meet the approval of the
Engineer for surface smoothness, finish and appearance.
If the surface ravels, ruts or deteriorates in any manner prior to the end of the warranty
period, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to correct this condition at his expense to the
satisfaction of the Engineer and in conformance with the requirements of this specification.
For HMAC rehabilitation and overlay projects, if cracks develop in the pavement surface
within the one year warranty period, the Contractor shall seal the cracks in accordance with
Item 313, "Rubber Asphalt Joint and Crack Sealer". Payment for this work will be measured
and paid for as Mobilization (LS) and Crack Sealing (LF).
For new HMAC roadways constructed in accordance with the Drawings and specifications, if
cracks less than 1 /4 inch in width develop in the pavement surface within the one year
warranty period the Contractor shall seal the cracks in accordance with Item 313, "Rubber
Asphalt Joint and Crack Sealer'. Payment for this Work will be measured and paid for as
Mobilization (LS) and Crack Sealing (LF). If cracks equal to or greater than '/ inch in width
develop in the pavement surface within the one year warranty period, the cracking shall be
reviewed and evaluated by the Engineer before corrective action is taken.
340 8/23/96 Page 13 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
GRADATION ACCEPTANCE SCHEDULE (TEX- 210 -F)
SIEVE
DEVIATION FROM JOB MIX
FORMULA
PERCENT CONTRACT UNIT
PRICE REDUCTION
Total retained on No. 10
± 5.0
5.1±
0
10
Passing No. 200
±3.0
3.1 ±.
0
5
(b) Stability: Stability test results shall be used as indicators of potential problems. Where
stability test results fall outside the range specified in this specification, additional tests shall
be taken as directed by the Engineer for further evaluation and monitoring of the paving
mixture. This additional stability testing will be at the expense of the Contractor. When, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the stability is deemed unacceptable for the intended use of the
pavement, the paving mixture shall be removed and replaced to the limits indicated by test
results or may be left in place on conditions acceptable to the Engineer. When the paving
mixture is removed and replaced, it shall be at the sole expense of the Contractor.
Laboratory Density: Laboratory density results as determined by TxDOT Test Method Tex -
207-F shall be used as indicators of potential problems. Where laboratory density test results
are less than 94.5% or more than 97.5 %, additional tests shall be taken as directed by the
Engineer for further evaluation and monitoring of the paving mixture. This additional
laboratory density testing will be at the expense of the Contractor. When, in the opinion of the
Engineer, the laboratory density is deemed unacceptable for the intended use of the
pavement, the paving mixture shall be removed and replaced to the limits indicated by test
results.
(c)
Paving mixtures that are removed and replaced shall be at the sole expense of the
Contractor.
(d) Limited Areas: Irrespective of an acceptable overall Project average for any or all of the
Pay - Adjustment Acceptance Factors, limited substandard portions of the Work, as
determined by the Engineer, shall be remedied or removed and replaced to the satisfaction of
the Engineer at the expense of the Contractor.
(2) Pay- Adjustment Acceptance Factors: Contract unit prices shall be adjusted for paving mixtures
that fail to meet acceptance criteria for gradation, asphalt content, density and mat thickness in
accordance with the following:
40 8123/96 Page 14 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ASPHALT CONTENT ACCEPTANCE SCHEDULE (TEX- 210 -F)
Deviation from the Job Mix
Formula
Percent Contract Unit Price Reduction
Local Streets*
All Others
± 0.5
0
0
±0.51 to ±0.60
15
25
+0.61 to +0.70
25'
100; Remove and Replace
-0.61 to -0.70
100; Remove and Replace
100; Remove and Replace
Over ±0.70
100: Remove and Replace
100; Remove and Replace
'A local or residential street that serves as access to residence or other abutting property.
*if the street has an ADT of 500, or less, with 1 %, or less, of truck traffic, plus a 2 year warranty;
otherwise, Remove and Replace
DENSITY ACCEPTANCE SCHEDULE (TEX- 207- FJTEX- 227 -F)
*PERCENT DENSITY
Percent Contract Unit Price Reduction
1./2" Thickness or Greater
Less than 1 /s Thickness
Above 96
100; Remove and Replace
100; Remove and Replace
91 to 96
0
0
90.9 to 88.1
0.625 per 0.10% deficiency in
density
0.50 per 0.10% deficiency in
density
Less than 88.1
100: Remove and Replace
100; Remove and Replace
'Core bulk density divided by max. theoretical density
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
340 8123/96 Page 15 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
THICKNESS ACCEPTANCE SCHEDULE
VARIANCE PERCENT
OF THICKNESS
PERCENT CONTRACT UNIT PRICE REDUCTION
0 - 10
0
10.1 - 16
20
16.1 -25
50
Over 25
100; Remove and Replace or mill /overlay 1" minimum
The Density Acceptance Schedule will not apply to parking lots and other irregular shaped areas
in which it is difficult to properly compact. It will apply to utility trenches 4 feet or wider.
Core thicknesses greater than Drawing requirements shall be factored into calculation at Drawing
required thickness. If total thickness of lift(s) proves to be less than required, the Contractor may
remove and replace the overlay deficient areas as agreed to by the Engineer. Overlays to correct
thickness deficiencies shall be not less than one (1) inch thick. Overlays shall require milling of the
asphalt in order to prevent a "featheredge" of the overlaying pavement.
The extent of the area to be overlaid or removed and replaced shall be determined by additional
cores meeting the required thickness. All additional coring to determine the area shall be paid for
by the Contractor.
0.12 Measurement
)rk performed and material placed shall be measured under one of the following methods. When
awing quantity measurement is specified, adjustment of quantity may be made as follows. If the quantity
•asured as outlined vary from those shown on the Drawings by more than 5 %, either party to the
ntract may request in writing and adjustment of the quantity by each separate bid item. The party to the
ntract which requests the adjustment shall present to the other one copy of measurements and
culations showing the revised quantity in question. This revised quantity, when approved by the
gineer, shall constitute the final quantity for which payment will be made. However, no adjustment will
made for any quantity which exceeds the Drawing required thickness.
?thod A: Asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the ton (2,000 pounds) of the type actually
ed in completed and accepted Work in accordance with the Drawings and specifications.
:e measurement shall be made on approved truck scales that meet the requirements of the National
stitute of Standards and Technology Handbooks 44 and 112 except that the required accuracy shall be
4 percent of the load being weighed. The Contractor shall fumish a report of calibration from a scale
schanic licensed by the Texas Department of Agriculture certifying that the scales meet this requirement.
0 8/23/96 Page 16 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Method B: Asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the square yard of specified total thickness
of the type of paving mixture actually used in completed and accepted Work in accordance with Drawings
and specifications. Multiple lifts of the same type shall be considered as one for square yard measurement
' purposes.
Method C: Asphaltic concrete pavement shall be measured by the linear foot of specified total thickness of
the type of paving mixture actually used in completed and accepted Work in accordance with Drawings
and specifications. Multiple lifts of the same type shall be considered as one for linear foot measurement
purposes.
340.13 Payment
' Work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item and measured as provided under
"Measurement" will be paid for at the unit prices bid or pay adjusted unit price for HOT MIX ASPHALTIC
CONCRETE PAVEMENT, of the types and thicknesses specified, which prices shall be full compensation
1 for furnishing all labor, equipment, time, materials and incidentals necessary to complete the Work.
Tack coat, sawcutting and temporary pavement markings will not be measured or paid for directly but shall
1 be considered subsidiary to ITEM 340, "HOT MIX ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENT'.
Payment for Work meeting specifications will be made under one of the following:
' Pay Item No. 340 -A: Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, Type _, - Per Ton
Pay Item No. 340 -B: Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, _inches, Type _ - Per Square
1 Yard.
Pay Item No. 340 -C: Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, _Inches, Type - Per Linear
1 Foot.
Pay Item No. 340 -PQ: Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, _Inches, Type - Per
1 Drawing Quantity.
Pay Item No. 340 -L: Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement, _in., Type _ - Level -up Course.
Pay Item No. 340 -M: Crack Sealing Mobilization, Lump Sum.
Pay Item No. 340S: Crack Sealing, per Linear Foot.
End
Ref: 230, 232, 301, 307, 313, 864, 1804
1
1
1
1
340 8123196 Page 17 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
8/23/96 Page 18 Hot Mix Asphaltic Concrete Pavement
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
375.2 Materials
ITEM NO. 375
CONCRETE PAVERS FOR SIDEWALK RAMPS
375.1 Description
This item shall consist of furnishing and installing interlocking concrete pavers manufactured for the
construction of paved sidewalk ramps, constructed as herein specified on an approved base or subgrade
in conformity to the lines, grades and details indicated or as established by the Engineer.
(1) Base Course
Base Course will be placed, compacted and paid for under Item No. 210, "Flexible Base".
(2) Concrete Pavers
Concrete Pavers shall be modular concrete pavers conforming to ASTM Designation: C 936 for
solid concrete interlocking paving units.
(3) Pigments
Pigments used in concrete pavers shall be synthetic iron oxide and shall be alkali- resistant, light
fast, water insoluble, chemically inert and weather resistant.
(4) Sand Cushion
Sand Cushion shall be concrete sand Grade No. 1 as indicated in Table 2, Item No. 403,
"Concrete for Structures ". The bedding sand shall be free of deleterious soluble salts or other
contaminants likely to cause efflorescence or contribute to reduced skid resistance. The moisture
content shall be from 3 to 7 percent.
(5) Mortar
Mortar shall be composed of one part portland cement, one part masonry cement (or ' part
hydrated lime), sand equal to 2'% to 3 times the sum of the volumes of the cement and lime used,
and enough water to make the mixture plastic.
375.3 Physical Requirements
The general shape of the concrete pavers shall be similar to that indicated. The concrete pavers shall be of
the color and laid in the pattern as specified or as approved in writing by the Engineer.
All units shall be sound and free of defects that would interfere with the appearance or proper placing of
the unit or impair the strength or longevity of the final structure. Any units which are structurally damaged
during the work shall be immediately removed and replaced.
375 5/16/94 Page 1 Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps
4 Construction Method
:cessary excavation, filling and grading of the slopes adjacent to the completed concrete pavers will
■nsidered subsidiary to this item, unless included as a separate pay item in the Contract.
•
subgrade or base course shall be shaped to the lines, grades and cross sections as indicated or as
:ed by the Engineer and shall be thoroughly compacted.
subgrade is undercut by more than 4 inches or the natural ground is below "top of subgrade" by
than 4 inches, the necessary backfill shall be made with an approved material and compacted with a
ianical tamper. Hand tamping will not be permitted.
ncompacted sand bed base shall be screeded over the compacted base to a thickness of 1'/% to 2
:s. Bedding sand shall not be used for leveling the base course.
rete pavers shall be placed on a 2" minimum Class A Fibrous Concrete pad (see Item 407, "Fibrous
:rete" and Item 403, "Concrete for Structures "), to the indicated laying pattern. Paving units shall be
!d to achieve gaps nominally 1/16 to 1/8 inch wide between adjacent units such that all joints are
ctly aligned.
First row shall abut an edge restraint with a gap of 1/8 inch and shall be laid at a suitable angle to the
restraint to achieve the required visual orientation of paving units in the completed pavement.
Bch row, all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and fitted subsequently. Such closure
shall consist of not less than 25 percent of a full unit. Units may be cut using a mechanical or
aulic cutter or by power sawing. Any foot or wheel barrow traffic during the construction shall use
ds overlaying paving to prevent disturbance of units prior to final set. No other traffic shall be allowed
ie pavement at this stage of construction.
oon as practical after placement of pavers into the mortar bed. and in any case prior to the termination
ork on that day, and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, bedding sand for joint - filling shall be
ad over the pavement and allowed to dry. When dry, the filling sand shall be swept to fill the joints.
- traffic has been allowed on the pavers, joints shall be refilled with dry sand periodically until no
tional sand will be accepted in the joints.
.5 Measurement
3pted work performed as prescribed by this item will be measured by the square foot of surface area of
icrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps ".
.6 Payment
work performed as prescribed by this item will be paid for at the unit price bid per square foot for
ncrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps ", which price shall be full compensation for preparing the subgrade
n not included as a separate item; for furnishing and placing all materials, manipulation, labor, tools,
ipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
5/16/94 Page 2 Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No. 375: Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps mm - Per Square Foot.
End
Ref: 210, 403, 407
375 5/16/94 Page 3 Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps
5/16/94 Page 4 Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Ramps
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
y
1
1
1
1
1
403.2 Materials
ITEM NO. 403
CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES
403.1 Description
This item shall govern quality, storage, handling. proportioning and mixing of materials for Portland cement
concrete construction of buildings, bridges, culverts, slabs, prestressed concrete and incidental
appurtenances.
Concrete shall be composed of Portland cement or Portland cement and fly ash, water, aggregates (fine
and coarse), and admixtures proportioned and mixed as hereinafter provided to achieve specified results.
(1) Cementitious Materials
Portland cement shall conform to ASTM C 150, Type 1 (General Purpose), Type II (General
Purpose with Moderate Sulfate Resistance) and Type III (High Early Strength). Type I shall be
used when none is specified. Type I and Type III shall not be used when Type II is specified. Type
III may be used in lieu of Type I when the anticipated air temperature for the succeeding 12 hours
will not exceed 60 F. All cement shall be of the same type and from the same source for a
monolithic placement.
Portland cement manufactured in a cement kiln fueled by hazardous waste (30 Texas
Administrative Code, Section 335.1) shall be prohibited. This applies to any other specification
concerning the use of cement materials. Contractor shall maintain a record of source for each
batch. Supplier shall certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw materials.
Fly ash (denoted by TEX designations Type A and Type B) may replace 20 to 35 percent of a mix
design's Portland cement content by absolute volume. Fly ash shall not be used in mix designs
with less than five (5) sacks of Portland cement per cubic yard unless specifically permitted by the
contract plans or project manual. Fly Ash may be used in all other classes of concrete, except that
Type B fly ash shall not be used with Type II cement. Fly ash shall conform to the requirements of
Item 405, "Concrete Admixtures."
(2) Mixing Water
Water for use in concrete and for curing shall be potable water free of oils, acids, organic matter
or other deleterious substances and shall not contain more than 1,000 parts per million of
chlorides as CI or sulfates as SO.
Contractor may request approval of water from other sources. Contractor shall arrange for
samples to be taken from the source and tested at his expense. Water quality tests shall conform
to AASHTO Method T 26 except where such methods are in conflict with provisions of this
specification.
403 5/18/95 Page 1 Concrete for Structures
Table 1: Course Aggregate Gradation Chart (TEX 401 -a, Percent Retained)
de
Nom.
Size
2%:"
2"
1 '/_"
1"
'/."
'/2"
318"
No. 4
No. 8
2 ' /2'
0
0 -20
15 -50
60 -80
95 -100
1 '/"
0
0 -5
30 -65
70 -90
95 -100
1'
0
0 -5
10-40
40 -75
95 -100
1„
0
0 -5
40 -75
90 -100
95 -100
3/4^
0
0 -10
45 -80
90 -100
95 -100
3) Coarse Aggregate
Coarse aggregate shall consist of durable particles of crushed or uncrushed gravel, crushed blast
furnace slag, crushed stone or combinations thereof; free from frozen material or injurious
amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable material either free or as an
adherent coating. It shall not contain more than 0.25 percent by weight of clay lumps, nor more
than 1.0 percent by weight of shale nor more than 5 percent by weight of laminated and /or friable
particles when tested in accordance with TXDOT Test Method TEX- 413 -A. It shall have a wear of
not more than 40 percent when tested in accordance with TXDOT Test Method TEX- 410 -A.
Unless otherwise indicated, coarse aggregate shall be subjected to 5 cycles of the soundness test
conforming to TXDOT Test Method TEX- 411 -A. The loss shall not be greater than 12 percent
when sodium sulfate is used or 18 percent when magnesium sulfate is used.
Coarse aggregate shall be washed. The Loss by Decantation (TXDOT Test Method TEX -406 -A),
plus allowable weight of clay lumps, shall not exceed 1 percent or value indicated on the plans or
in the project manual, whichever is less. If material finer than the 200 sieve is definitely
established to be dust of fracture of aggregates made primarily from crushing of stone, essentially
free from clay or shale as established by TXDOT Test Method TEX- 406 -A, the percent may be
increased to 1.5.
The coarse aggregate factor may not be more than 0.82; however, when voids in the coarse
aggregate exceed 48 percent of the total rodded volume, the coarse aggregate factor shall not
exceed 0.85. The coarse aggregate factor may not be less than 0.68 except for a Class I machine
extruded mix that shall not have a coarse aggregate factor not lower than 0.61.
When exposed aggregate surfaces are required, the coarse aggregate shall consist of particles
with at least 40 percent crushed faces. Uncrushed gravel, polished aggregates and clear resilient
coatings are not acceptable for exposed aggregate pedestrian surfaces (i.e. sidewalks, driveways,
medians, islands, etc.). Grade 5 aggregates shall be used for exposed aggregate finishes.
When tested by approved methods, the coarse aggregate including combinations of aggregates
when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 1.
5/18/95
Page 2
Concrete for Structures
1
1
1
1
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 2: Fine Aggregate Gradation Chart (TEX 401 -A, Percent Retained)
3/8 ""
No. 4
No. 8
No. 16
No. 30
No. 50
No. 100
No. 200
0
0 -5
0 -20
15 -50
35 -75
65 -90
90 -100
97 -100
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(4) Fine Aggregate
Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable and uncoated particles of natural or
manufactured sand or a combination thereof, with or without a mineral filler. It shall be free from
frozen material or injurious amounts of salt, alkali, vegetable matter or other objectionable
material and it shall not contain more than 0.5 percent by weight of clay lumps. When subjected to
color test for organic impurities per TXDOT Test Method TEX- 408 -A, it shall not show a color
darker than standard.
Acid insoluble residue of fine aggregate used in slab concrete subject to direct traffic shall not be
less than 28 percent by weight when tested conforming to TXDOT Test Method TEX- 612 -J.
When tested by approved methods, the fine aggregate, including combinations of aggregates,
when used, shall conform to the grading requirements shown in Table 2.
Where sand equivalence is greater than 85, retainage on No. 50 sieve may be 65 to 94 percent.
Where manufactured sand is used in lieu of natural sand, the percent retained on No. 200 sieve
shall be 94 to 100. Sand equivalent per TXDOT Test Method TEX -203 -F shall not be less than 80
nor less than otherwise indicated, whichever is greater. The fineness modulus will be determined
by adding the percentages by weight retained on sieve Nos. 4, 8, 16, 30, 50 and 100 and dividing
the sum of the six sieves by 100. For Class A and C concrete, the fineness modulus shall be
between 2.30 and 3.10. For Class H concrete, the fineness modulus shall be between 2.40 and
2.90.
(5) Mineral Filler
Mineral filler shall consist of stone dust, clean crushed sand, approved fly ash or other approved
inert material.
(6) Mortar (Grout)
Mortar for repair of concrete shall consist of 1 part cement, 2 parts finely graded sand and enough
water to make the mixture plastic. When required to prevent color difference, white cement shall
be added to produce color required. When required by the Engineer, an approved latex adhesive
shall be added to the mortar.
(7) Admixtures
All admixtures shall comply with the requirements of ITEM 405 CONCRETE ADMIXTURES.
Calcium chloride -based admixtures shall not be approved.
403 5/18/95 Page 3 Concrete for Structures
.3 Storage of Cement and Fly Ash
ent and fly ash shall be stored in separate and well ventilated, weatherproof buildings or approved
which will protect the material from dampness or absorption of moisture. Storage facilities shall be
y accessible and each shipment of packaged cement shall be kept separated to provide for
lification and inspection. Engineer may permit small quantities of sacked cement to be stored in the
1 for a maximum of 48 hours on a raised platform and under waterproof covering.
.4 Storage of Aggregates
. egates shall be stockpiled in sizes to facilitate blending. If the aggregate is not stockpiled on a hard,
contaminant base, the bottom 6 inch layer of the stockpile shall not be used without recleaning the
egate. Where space is limited, stockpiles shall be separated by walls or other appropriate barriers.
.egate shall be stockpiled and protected from the weather a minimum of 24 hours prior to use to
-nize free moisture content. When stockpiles are too large to protect from the weather, accurate and
inuous means acceptable to the Engineer shall be provided to monitor aggregate temperature and
;cure. Aggregates shall be stockpiled and handled such that segregation and contamination are
mized.
.5 Measurement of Materials
er shall be accurately metered. Fine and coarse aggregates, mineral filler, bulk cement and fly ash
I be weighed separately. Allowances shall be made in the water volume and aggregate weights during
hing for moisture content of aggregates and admixtures. Volumetric and weight measuring devices
I be acceptable to Engineer.
;h weighing of sacked cement is not required; however, bags, individually and entire shipments, may
vary by more than 3 percent from the specified weight of 94 pounds per bag. The average bag weight
shipment shall be determined by weighing 50 bags taken at random.
.6 Mix Design
tractor shall furnish a mix design acceptable to the Engineer for class of concrete specified. The mix
11 be designed by a qualified commercial laboratory and signed /sealed by a Texas - registered
fessional Engineer to conform with requirements contained herein, to ACI 211.1 or TXDOT Bulletin C-
(and supplements thereto). Contractor shall perform, at his own expense, the work required to
stantiate the design, including testing of strength specimens. Complete concrete design data shall be
mitted to the Engineer for approval. The mix design will be valid for a period of one (1) year provided
there are no changes to the component materials.
he end of one (1) year, a previously- approved mix may be resubmitted for approval if it can be shown
no substantial change in the component materials has occurred. The resubmittal analysis must be
ewed, signed and sealed by a Texas - registered Professional Engineer. This resubmittal will include a
- ialysis of specific gravity, absorption, finess modulus, sand equivalent, soundness, wear and unit
ghts of the aggregates. Provided that the fineness modulus did not deviate by more than 0.20 or that
reproportioned total mixing water, aggregate and cement (or cement plus fly ash) are within 1, 2, and 3
cent, respectively, of pre- approved quantities, a one -year extension on the approval of the mix may be
nted by the Engineer. Updated cement, fly ash, and admixture certifications shall accompany the
ubmittal.
5/18/95 Page 4 Concrete for Structures
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 3: Slump Requirements
Type of Construction
Slump, inches
Max.
Min.
Cased Drilled Shafts
4
3
Reinforced Foundation Caissons and Footings
3
1
Reinforced Footings and Substructure Walls
3
1
Uncased Drilled Shafts
6
5
Thin- walled Sections (9 inches or less)
5
4
Prestressed Concrete Members
5
4
Precast Drainage Structures
6
4
Wall Sections over 9 inches
4
3
Reinforced Building Slabs, Beams, Columns and Walls
4
1
Bridge Decks
4
2
Pavements, Fixed -form
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
Approved admixtures conforming to Item 405, "Concrete Admixtures" may be used with all classes of
concrete at the option of the Contractor provided that specific requirements of the governing concrete
structure specification are met. Water reducing and retarding agents shall be required for hot weather,
large mass, and continuous slab placements. Air entraining agents may be used in all mixes but must be
used in the classes indicated on Table 4. Unless approved by the Engineer, mix designs shall not exceed
air contents for extreme exposure conditions as recommended by ACI 211.1 for the various aggregate
grades.
403.7 Consistency and Quality of Concrete
Consistency and quality of concrete should allow efficient placement and completion of finishing operations
oefore initial set. Retempering shall not be allowed. When field conditions are such that additional moisture
:s needed for final concrete surface finishing operation, required water shall be applied to surface by fog
spray only and shall be held to a minimum. Concrete shall be workable, cohesive, possess satisfactory
finishing qualities and of stiffest consistency that can be placed and vibrated into a homogeneous mass
within slump requirements specified in Table 3. Excessive bleeding shall be avoided and in no case will it
pe permissible to expedite finishing and drying by sprinkling the surface with cement powder. No concrete
will be permitted with a slump in excess of the maximums shown unless water reducing admixtures have
peen previously approved. Slump values shall conform to TXDOT Test Method TEX- 415 -A.
403
5/18/95
Page 5
Concrete for Structures
Table 3: Slump Requirements (Continued)
Type of Construction
Slump, inches
Max.
Min.
Pavements, Slip -form
11/2
'14
Sidewalks, Driveways and Slabs on Ground
4
2
Curb & Gutter, Hand - vibrated
3
1
Curb & Gutter, Hand - tamped or spaded
4
2
Curb & Gutter, Slip- form /extrusion machine
2
'/
Heavy Mass Construction
2
1
High Strength Concrete
4
3
Riprap and Other Miscellaneous Concrete
6
1
Under Water or Seal Concrete
6
5
ng progress of the work, Engineer or City's testing laboratory shall cast test cylinders and /or beams as
iec( on compressive and /or flexural strength of concrete actually placed. Engineer or City's testing
ratory may also perform slump tests, entrained air tests and temperature checks to ensure compliance
specifications.
)ortioning of all material components shall be checked prior to discharging. Excluding mortar material
ore- coating of the mixer drum [403.8(2)] and adjustment for moisture content of admixtures and
- egates, material components shall fall within the range of ± 1 % for water, + 2% for aggregates, + 3%
:ement, -2% for fly ash and within manufacturer recommended dosage rates for admixtures except that
ntrainment shall be + 1' /s points of the mix design requirements.
:ss otherwise specified, concrete mix temperature shall not exceed 90° F except in mixes with high
le water reducers where a maximum mix temperature of 100° F will be allowed. Cooling an otherwise
aptable mix by addition of water or ice will not be allowed.
beams or cylinders will be required for small placements such as manholes, inlets, culverts,
lwalls, etc. Engineer may vary the number of tests to a minimum of 1 for each 25 cubic yards placed
a several day period.
t beams or cylinders shall be required for each monolithic placement of bridge decks or
rstructures, top slabs of direct traffic culverts, cased drilled shafts, structural beams and as otherwise
cted by Engineer for design strength or early form removal. Test beams or cylinders made for early
i removal or use of structure will be at Contractor's expense, except when required by Engineer.
5/18/95 Page 6 Concrete for Structures
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Table 4: Classes of Concrete
Class
Sk Cement
Per CY
Min. 28 Day
psi
Min. Beam
7 Day psi
*Max. WIC
Ratio
Coarse
Agg. No.
'• Air Ent.
A
5.0
3000
500
6.5
1,2,3,4,5
Yes
B
4.0
2000
300
8.0
2,3,4,5
No
C
6.0
3600
600
6.0
1,2,3,4,5
Yes
D
4.5
2500
425
7.5
2,3,4
No
H
6.0
As ind.
As Ind.
5.5
3,4
Yes
I
5.5
3500
575
6.2
2,3,4,5
Yes
J
2.0
800
N/A
N/A
2,3,4,5
No
S
6.0
3600
600
5.0
2,3,4,5
Yes
Notes:
1. Grade 1 coarse
with 4 inch minimum
2. When Type
550 psi; with
3. The design
or TXDOT C -11
4. "Maximum
by Engineer,
aggregate may be used in massive foundations only (except cased drilled shafts)
clear spacing between reinforcing steel.
11 cement is used in Class C or S concrete, the 7 day beam break requirement will be
Class A, 460 psi., minimum.
water - cement ratio shall be appropriately adjusted for mixes with fly ash per ACI 211.1
(and supplements thereto), as applicable.
air design contents for the five grades of coarse aggregate, unless otherwise approved
are: 4.5% for Grade 1, 5.5% for Grade 2, and 6.0% for Grades 3, 4, and 5.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4 strength test shall be defined as the average of breaking strength of 2 cylinders or 2 beams as
applicable. Specimens will be tested conforming to TXDOT Test Method TEX -418 -A or TEX- 420 -A. If
•equired strength or consistency of class of concrete being produced cannot be secured with minimum
: ementitious material specified or without exceeding maximum water /cementitious material ratio,
-ontractor will be required to furnish different aggregates, use a water reducing agent, an air entraining
agent or increase cementitious material content in order to provide concrete meeting these specifications.
Test specimens shall be cured using the same methods and under the same conditions as the concrete
. epresented. Design strength beams and cylinders shall be cured conforming to TXDOT Bulletin C -11 (and
Supplements thereto).
Nhen control of concrete quality is by 28 day compressive tests, job control will be by 7 day flexural tests.
f the required 7 day strength is not secured with the quantity of cement specified in Table 4, changes in
:he mix design shall be made and resubmitted for approval.
403
5/18/95
Page 7
Concrete for Structures
3.8 Mixing and Mixing Equipment
equipment, tools and machinery used for hauling materials and performing any part of the work shall be
intained in such condition to insure completion of the work without excessive delays.
ing shall be done in a mixer of approved type and size that will produce uniform distribution of material
)ughout the mass and shall be capable of producing concrete meeting requirements of ASTM C 94,
3 dy -mixed Concrete and these specifications. Mixing equipment shall be capable of producing sufficient
crete to provide required quantities. Entire contents of the drum shall be discharged before any
terials are placed therein for a succeeding batch. Improperly mixed concrete shall not be placed in a
icture. The mixer may be batched by either volumetric or weight sensing equipment and shall be
ipped with a suitable timing device that will lock the discharging mechanism and signal when specified
e of mixing has elapsed.
(1) Proportioning and Mixing Equipment
For all miscellaneous concrete placements, a mobile, continuous, volumetric mixer or a volumetric
or weight batch mixer of the rotating paddle type may be used.
When approved by Engineer in writing or when specified for use, these mixers may be used for
other types of concrete construction, including structural concrete, if the number of mixers
furnished will supply the amount of concrete required for the particular operation in question.
These mixers shall be designed to receive all the concrete ingredients, including admixtures,
required by the mix design in a continuous uniform rate and mix them to the required consistency
before discharging. Mixers shall have adequate water supply and metering devices.
For continuous volumetric mixers, the materials delivered during a revolution of the driving
mechanism or in a selected interval, will be considered a batch and the proportion of each
ingredient will be calculated in the same manner as for a batch type plant.
Mixing time shall conform to recommendations of manufacturer of mixer unless otherwise directed
by Engineer.
(2) Ready -mixed Concrete
Use of ready -mixed concrete will be permitted provided the batching plant and mixer trucks meet
quality requirements specified herein. When ready -mixed concrete is used, additional mortar (1
sack cement, 3 parts sand and sufficient water) shall be added to each batch to coat the mixer
drum. Ready -mixed concrete, batching plant and mixer truck operation shall include the following:
A ticket system will be used that includes a copy for the Inspector. Ticket will have machine
stamped time /date of concrete batch, weight of cement, fly ash, sand and aggregates; exact
nomenclature and written quantities of admixtures and water. Any item missing or incomplete
on ticket may be cause for rejection of concrete.
(b) Sufficient trucks will be available to support continuous placements. Contractor will satisfy
Engineer that adequate standby trucks are available to support monolithic placement
requirements.
(a)
3 5/18/95 Page 8 Concrete for Structures
(c) A portion of mixing water required by the mix design to produce the specified slump may be
withheld and added at the job site, but only with permission of Engineer and under the
Inspector's observation. When water is added under these conditions, it will be thoroughly
mixed before any slump or strength samples are taken. Additional cement shall not be added
at the job site to otherwise unacceptable mixes.
(d) A metal plate(s) shall be attached in a prominent place on each truck mixer plainly showing
the various uses for which it was designed. The data shall include the drum's speed of
rotation for mixing and for agitating and the capacity for complete mixing and /or agitating
only. A copy of the manufacturer's design, showing dimensions of blades, shall be available
for inspection at the plant at all times. Accumulations of hardened concrete shall be removed
to the satisfaction of the Engineer or Owner.
(e) The loading of the transit mixers shall not exceed capacity as shown on the manufacturer's
plate attached.to the mixer or 63 percent of the drum volume, whichever is the lesser volume.
The loading of transit mixers to the extent of causing spill -out en route to delivery will not be
acceptable. Consistent spillage will be cause for disqualification of a supplier.
(f) Excess concrete remaining in the drum after delivery and wash water after delivery shall not
be dumped on the project site unless approval of the dump location is first secured from the
Engineer or Owner.
(3) Hand - mixed Concrete
Hand mixing of concrete may be permitted for small placements or in case of an emergency and
then only on authorization of the Engineer. Hand -mixed batches shall not exceed a 4 cubic foot
batch in volume. Material volume ratios shall not be leaner than 1 part cement, 2 parts large
aggregate, 1 part fine aggregate and enough water to produce a consistent mix with a slump not
to exceed 4 inches. Admixtures shall not be used unless specifically approved by the Engineer.
403.9 Excavation, Placing of Concrete, Finishing, Curing and Backfill
Excavation, placing of concrete, finishing, curing and backfill shall conform to Item 401, "Structural
Excavation and Backfill ", and Item 410, "Concrete Structures ".
403.10 Measurement
Where measurement of concrete for a structure is not provided by another governing pay item in the
Project Manual, measurement shall be made under this specification in accordance with the following.
The quantities of concrete of the various classifications which constitute the completed and accepted
structure or structures in place will be measured by the cubic yard, each, square foot, square yard or linear
foot as indicated in the Project Manual. Measurement will be as follows:
(1) General
Measurement based on dimensions shall be for the completed structure as measured in
place. However, field- measured dimensions shall not exceed those indicated on the plans or
as may have been directed by the Engineer in writing.
(a)
403 5/18/95 Page 9 Concrete for Structures
(3)
(b) No deductions shall be made for chamfers less than 2 inches in depth, embedded portions of
structural steel, reinforcing steel, nuts, bolts, conduits less than 5 inches in diameter, pre /post
tensioning tendons, keys, waterstops, weep holes and expansion joints 2 inches or less in
width.
(c)
No measurement shall be made for concrete keys between adjoining beams or prestressed
concrete planks.
(d) No measurement shall be made for tit concrete between the ends or adjoining prestressed
concrete planks /box beams at bent caps or between the ends of prestressed concrete
planks /box beams and abutment end walls.
(e) No measurement shall be made for inlet and junction box invert concrete.
(f)
No measurement shall be made for any additional concrete required above the normal slab
thickness for camber or crown.
(2) Plan Quantity. For those items measured for plan quantity payment, adequate calculations have
been made. If no adjustment is required by Article 403.11, additional measurements or
calculations will not be required or made.
(3) Measured in Place. For those items not measured for Plan Quantity payment, measurement will
be made in place, subject to the requirements of Article 403.10(1)(a) above.
.11 Payment
work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item and measured in accordance with
applicable provisions of "Measurement" above will be paid for as follows.
quantity to be paid for will be that quantity shown on the contract plans and/or in the Project Manual,
.rdless of errors in calculations, except as may be modified by the following.
Quantities will be adjusted:
(1) When a complete structure element has been erroneously included or omitted from the plans, the
quantity shown on the plans for that element will be added to or deducted from the plan quantity
and included for payment. A complete structure element will be the smallest portion of a total
structure for which a quantity is included on the plans. Quantities revised in this manner will not be
subject to the provisions of the "General Conditions ", Article 11.
(2) When the plan quantity for a complete structure element is in error by 5 percent or more, a
recalculation will be made and the corrected quantity included for payment. Quantities revised in
this manner will not be subject to the provisions of the "General Conditions ", Article 11
When quantities are revised by a change in design, the "plan quantity" will be increased or
decreased by the amount involved in the design change. Quantities revised in this manner will be
subject to the provisions of the "General Conditions ", Article 11.
party tc the contract requesting the adjustment shall present to the other, a copy of the description
location. together with calculations of the quantity for the structure element involved. When this
ntity is certified correct by the Engineer, it will become the revised plan quantity.
5/18195 Page 10 Concrete for Structures
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Pay Item No. 403: (Structure or Structural Component) - Per (Unit Measure).
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
iment for increased or decreased costs due to a change in design on those items measured as "Cubic
- d ", "Each ", "Square Foot ", "Square Yard" or "Linear Foot" will be determined by Change Order.
antities revised in this manner will be subject to the provisions of the "General Conditions ", Article 11.
unit prices bid for the various classes of concrete shown shall be full compensation for fumishing,
/ling, and mixing all concrete material; placing, finishing and curing all concrete; all grouting and
nting; furnishing and placing drains: furnishing and placing metal flashing strips; furnishing and placing
)ansion joint material required by this item; and for all forms and falsework, labor, tools, equipment and
dentals necessary to complete the work.
f.: 401, 405, 410
J3 5/18/95 Page 11 Concrete for Structures
405.1 Description
This item shall govern material requirements of admixtures for Portland cement concrete.
405.2 Materials
ITEM NO. 405
CONCRETE ADMIXTURES
All admixture submittals must be approved by the Engineer. No admixture shall be chloride -based or have
chloride(s) added in the manufacturing process. Admixtures must be pretested by the Texas Department
of Transportation (TXDOT) Materials and Tests Engineer and be included in the State's current approved
admixture list. All admixtures must retain an approved status through the duration of a mix design's one -
year approval period.
(1) Air Entraining Admixture: An "Air Entraining Admixture" is defined as a material which, when
added to a concrete mixture in the proper quantity, will entrain uniformly dispersed microscopic air
bubbles in the concrete mix. The admixture shall meet the requirements of ASTM Designation: C
260 modified as follows:
(a) The cement used in any series of test shall be either the cement proposed for the specific
work or a "reference" Type I cement from one mill.
(b) The air entraining admixture used in the reference concrete shall be Neutralized Vinsol Resin.
(2) Water- reducing Admixture: A "Water- reducing Admixture" is defined as a material which, when
added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity of mixing water
required to produce concrete of a given consistency and required strength. This admixture shall
conform to ASTM C 494, Type A.
(3) Accelerating Admixture: An "Accelerating Admixture" is defined as an admixture that
accelerates the setting time and the early strength development of concrete. This admixture shall
conform to ASTM C 494, Type C. The accelerating admixture will contain no chlorides.
(4) Water- reducing, Retarding Admixture: A "Water- reducing, Retarding Admixture' is defined as a
material which, when added to a concrete mixture in the correct quantity, will reduce the quantity
of mixing water required to produce concrete of a given consistency and retard the initial set of
the concrete. This admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type D.
High -range Water Reducing Admixtures: A "High -range Water Reducing Admixture ", referred
to as a superplasticizer, is defined as a synthetic polymer material which, when added to a low
slump concrete mixture increases the slump without adversely affecting segregation,
impermeability or durability of the mix. This admixture shall conform to ASTM C 494, Type F or G.
(5)
405 5118195 Page 1 Concrete Admixtures
6) FIy Ash: Fly ash used in Portland cement concrete as a substitute for Portland cement or as a
mineral filler shall comply with TXDOT Materials Specification D -9 -8900 and be listed on TXDOTs
current list of approved fly ash sources. FIy ash obtained from a source using a process fueled by
hazardous waste (30 Texas Administrative Code, Section 335.1) shall be prohibited. This applies
to any other specification concerning the use of fly ash. Contractor shall maintain a record of
source for each batch. Supplier shall certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw
materials.
3 Certification and Product Information
Contractor shall submit the name of the admixture proposed and manufacturer's certification that the
:ted admixtures meet the requirements of this item and of ASTM C 260 and C 494 as applicable.
ixtures for a mix design shall be of the same brand. If more than one admixture is proposed in the
rete mix, a statement of compatibility of components shall accompany certification. Manufacturer's
uct literature shall specify when in the batching /mixing operation the admixture must be added.
Engineer may request additional information such as infrared spectrophotometry scan, solids content,
•alue, etc., for further consideration. Any unreported changes in formulation discovered by any of the
prescribed herein may be cause to permanently bar the manufacturer from furnishing admixtures for
er's work.
.4 Construction Use of Admixtures
admixtures used shall be liquid except high -range water reducers which may be a powder. Liquid
Fixtures shall be agitated as needed to prevent separation or sedimentation of solids: however, air
ation of Neutralized Vinsol Resin will not be allowed.
admixture shall be dispensed on dry aggregates. Admixtures shall be dispensed at the batching site
arately, but at the same time as the mixing water. Only high range water reducers may be introduced
the mix at the job site.
=_n other admixtures are used with fly ash, the amount of the other admixture to be used shall be based
he amount of Portland cement only and not the amount of Portland cement and fly ash.
en high -range water reducers are to be added at the job site, transit mixers shall be used. Admixture
- iufacturer literature shall indicate recommended mixing methods and time for the specific equipment
mix design used. The transit mix equipment shall not be loaded in excess of 63 percent of its rated
,acity to ensure proper mixing of the admixture at the site. If during discharging of concrete a change in
np in excess of 30% is noted, the remaining concrete shall be rejected unless prior approval was given
the Engineer to retemper a load with a second charge of admixture. Retempering with water shall not
allowed.
:elerating admixtures will not be permitted in combination with Type II cement.
mixes with air entrainment shall have a minimum relative durability factor of 80 in accordance with
TM C 260. Dosage of air entrainment admixtures may be adjusted by the Contractor to stay within the
acified tolerances for air entrainment of ITEM 403 CONCRETE FOR STRUCTURES.
5/18/95 Page 2 Concrete Admixtures
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
405.5 Measurement and Payment
The requirements of this specifications shall not be measured and paid for directly, but shall be subsidiary
to the various bid items in the project manual.
End
1 Ref.: 403
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
405 5118/95 Page 3 Concrete Admixtures
1
5/18/95
Page 4
Concrete Admixtures
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
f1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
t ITEM NO. 406
REINFORCING STEEL
406.1 Description
I This item shall consist of the furnishing and placing of reinforcing steel, deformed and smooth, of the size
and quantity indicated and in accordance with these specifications.
' 406.2 Materials
(1) Bars
Bar reinforcement shall be deformed and shall conform to ASTM A 615, A 616, Grades 40, 60 or
' 75 and shall be open - hearth, basic oxygen or electric furnace new billet steel, unless otherwise
indicated. Large diameter new billet steel (Nos. 14 and 18), Grade 75, will be permitted for
straight bars only.
' Where bending of bar sizes No. 14 or No. 18 of Grades 40 or 60 is required, bend testing shall be
performed on representative specimens as described for smaller bars in the applicable ASTM
specification. The required bend shall be 90 degrees at a minimum temperature of 60 F around a
'
pin having a diameter of 10 times the nominal diameter of the bar and shall be free of cracking.
Spiral reinforcement shalt be either smooth or deformed bars or wire of the minimum diameter
'
indicated. Bars for spiral reinforcement shall comply with ASTM A 675, A 615 or A 617. Wire shall
comply with ASTM A 82. The minimum yield strength for spiral reinforcement shall be 40,000 psi.
In cases where the provisions of this item are in conflict with the provisions of the ASTM
Designation to which reference is made, the provisions of this item shall govern.
' Report of chemical analysis showing the percentages of carbon, manganese, phosphorus and
sulphur will be required for all reinforcing steel when it is to be welded, except for drill shafts. No
tack welding will be allowed. All welding shall conform to the requirements of AWS D -1 -72.
' The nominal size and area and the theoretical weight (Ibs.) of reinforcing steel bars covered by
these specifications are as follows:
1
1
1
1
1
1
406 4117/86 Page 1 Reinforcing Steel
Bar Size
Number
Nominal Diameter
Inches
Nominal Area Square
Inches
Weight per
Linear Foot
2
0.250
0.05
0.167
3
0.375
0.11
0.376
4
0.500
0.20
0.668
5
0.625
0.31
1.043
6
0.750
0.44
1.502
7
0.875
0.60
2.044
8
1.000
0.79
2.670
9
1.128
1.00
3.400
10
1.270
1.27
4.303
11
1.410
1.56
5.313
14
1.693
2.25
7.65
18
2.257
4.00
13.60
Smooth bars, larger than No. 4, may be steel conforming to the above or may be furnished in any
steel that meets the physical requirements of ASTM A 36. •
Smooth, round bars shall be designated by size number through No. 4. Smooth bars above No. 4
shall be designated by diameter in inches.
2) Welded Wire Fabric
Wire for fabric reinforcement shall be cold -drawn from rods hot - rolled from open- hearth, basic
oxygen or electric furnace billet. Wire shall conform to the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for Cold -Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement, ASTM A 82 or A 496. Wire
fabric, when used as reinforcement, shall conform to ASTM A 185 or A 497.
When wire is ordered by size numbers, the following relation between size number, diameter in
inches and area shall apply unless otherwise indicated:
4/17186 Page 2 Reinforcing Steel
ri
1
1
1
1
_
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Size W Number
Nominal Diameter (inch)
Nominal Area square inches
31
0.628
0.310
30
0.618
0.300
28
0.597
0.280
26
0.575
0.260
24
0.553
0.240
22
0.529
0.220
20
0.505
0.200
18
0.479
0.180
16
0.451
0.160
14
0.422
0.140
12
0.391
0.120
10
0.357
0.100
8
0 -319
0.060
7
0.299
0.070
6
0.276
0.060
5.5
0.265
0.055
5
0.252
0.050
4.5
0.239
0.045
4
0.226
0.040
3.5
0.211
0.035
3
0.195
0.030
2.5
0.178
0.025
2
0.160
0.020
1.5
0.138
0.015
1.2
0.124
0.012
1
0.113
0.010
0.5
0.060
0.005
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
406
4/17/86
Page 3
Reinforcing Steel
Bar Number
Grade 40
Grade 60
3, 4, 5
3d
4d
6 7, g
4d
5d
Chair Types and Applicable Uses
uctural or Architectural Elements (columns, beams,
Ils, slabs) exposed to weather, not subjected to sand
sting, water blasting or grinding.
Galvanized steel or steel chairs with plastic
coated feet.
uctural or Architectural Elements exposed to weather
d subject to sand blasting, water blasting or grinding.
Stainless steel chairs -
uctural or Architectural Elements not exposed to
ather or corrosive conditions.
Uncoated steel chairs
abs and grade beams cast on grade.
Steel chairs with a base with 9 inch'
minimum area or sufficient area to prevent
the chair from sinking into fill or subgrade.
Precast mortar or concrete blocks meeting
the requirements of this item may be used.
)
Where deformed wire is required, the size number shall be preceded by D and for smooth wire
the prefix W shall be shown.
Chairs and Supports
Chairs and Supports shall be steel, precast mortar or concrete blocks cast in molds meeting the
approval of the Engineer /Architect of sufficient strength to position the reinforcement as indicated
when supporting the dead load of the reinforcement, the weight of the workers placing concrete
and the weight of the concrete bearing on the steel. Chairs shall be plastic coated when indicated.
3 Bending
einforcement shall be bent cold, true to the shapes indicated. Bending shall preferably be done in the
Irregularities in bending shall be cause for rejection.
ss otherwise indicated, the inside diameter of bar bends, in terms of the nominal bar diameter (d),
be as follows:
is of 90 degrees and greater in stirrups, ties and other secondary bars that enclose another bar in the
ends in main bars and in secondary bars not covered above.
4117185 Page 4
Reinforcing Steel
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Bar Number
Grade 40
Grade 60
Grade 75
3 thru 8
6d
6d
9, 10
8d
8d
—
11
8d
Bd
8d
14, 18
10d
10d
—
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 406.5 Storing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
406.4 Tolerances
Fabricating tolerances for bars shall not be greater than shown on Standard 406 -1.
Steel reinforcement shall be stored above the surface of the ground upon platforms, skids or other
supports and shall be protected as far as practicable from mechanical injury and surface deterioration
caused by exposure to conditions producing rust. When placed in the work, reinforcement shall be free
from dirt, paint, grease, oil or other foreign materials. Reinforcement shall be free from injurious defects
such as cracks and laminations. Rust, surface seams, surface irregularities or mill scale will not be cause
for rejection, provided the minimum dimensions, cross sectional area and tensile properties of a hand wire
brushed specimen meets the physical requirements for the size and grade of steel indicated.
406.6 Splices
No splicing of bars, except when indicated or specified herein, will be permitted without written approval of
the Engineer /Architect. No substitution of bars will be allowed without the approval of the Engineer/
Architect. Any splicing of substituted bars shall conform to Table 1.
Splices not indicated will be permitted in slabs not more than 15 inches in thickness, columns, walls and
parapets, but not included for measurement, subject to the following:
Splices will not be permitted in bars 30 feet or less in plan length. For bars exceeding 30 feet in plan
length, the distance center to center of splices shall not be less than 30 feet minus 1 splice length, with no
more than 1 individual bar length less than 10 feet. Splices not indicated, but permitted hereby, shall
conform to Table 1. The specified concrete cover shall be maintained at such splices and the bars placed
in contact and securely tied together.
406 4/17/86 Page 5 Reinforcing Steel
Table 1
Minimum Lap Requirements
Bar Number
Grade 40
Grade 60
3
1 foot 0 inches
1 foot 0 inches
4
1 foot 2 inches
1 foot 9 inches
5
1 foot 5 inches
2 feet 2 inches
6
1 foot 9 inches
2 feet 7 inches
7
2 feet 4 inches
3 feet 5 inches
No. 8
3 feet 0 inches
4 feet 6 inches
No. 9
3 feet 10 inches
5 feet 8 inches
No. 10
4 feet 10 inches
7 feet 3 inches
No. 11
5 feet 11 inches
8 feet 11 inches
al steel shall be lapped a minimum of 1 turn. Bar No. 14 and No. 18 may not be lapped.
ding of reinforcing bars may be used only where indicated or as permitted herein. All welding
- ations, processes, equipment, materials, workmanship and inspection shall conform to the
iirements indicated. All splices .shall be of such dimension and character as to develop the full strength
ie bar being spliced.
preparation for butt welding reinforcing bars shall be done in the field, except Bar No. 6 and larger
II be done in the shop. Delivered bars shall be of sufficient length to permit this practice.
box culvert extensions with less than 1 foot of fill, the existing longitudinal bars shall have a lap with the
bars as shown in Table 1. For box culvert extensions with more than 1 foot of fill, a minimum lap of 6
les will be required.
ess otherwise indicated, dowel bars transferring tensile stresses shall have a minimum embedment
al to the minimum lap requirements shown in Table 1. Shear transfer dowels shall have a minimum
Dedment of 12 inches.
4/17/86 Page 6 Reinforcing Steel
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' Placing
orcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position indicated. Unless otherwise .indicated,
isions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the
st surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/12 of the spacing
en bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary
clan placement by more than Y. inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall be as
s:
ical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto.
reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved
anized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers
oproved precast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on a project, representative
pies of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent
tion of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours.
4/17/86 Page 7
Reinforcing Steel
Minimum Cover, Inches
;oncrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth
3
;oncrete exposed to earth or weather:
Bar No. 6 through 18 bars
2
Bar No. 5, W31 or D31 wire and smaller
1'
:oncrete not exposed to weather or in contact with ground:
Slabs, walls, joists:
Bar No. 14 and 18
1%
Bar No. 11 and smaller
1
Beams, columns:
Primary reinforcement, ties, stirrups, spirals
1'
Shells, folded plate members:
.
Bar No. 6 and larger
1
Bar No. 5, W31 or D31 wire, and smaller
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
' Placing
orcement shall be placed as near as possible in the position indicated. Unless otherwise .indicated,
isions shown for reinforcement are to the centers of the bars. In the plane of the steel parallel to the
st surface of concrete, bars shall not vary from plan placement by more than 1/12 of the spacing
en bars. In the plane of the steel perpendicular to the nearest surface of concrete, bars shall not vary
clan placement by more than Y. inch. Cover of concrete to the nearest surface of steel shall be as
s:
ical stirrups shall always pass around the main tension members and be attached securely thereto.
reinforcing steel shall be spaced its required distance from the form surface by means of approved
anized metal spacers, metal spacers with plastic coated tips, stainless steel spacers, plastic spacers
oproved precast mortar or concrete blocks. For approval of plastic spacers on a project, representative
pies of the plastic shall show no visible indications of deterioration after immersion in a 5 percent
tion of sodium hydroxide for 120 hours.
4/17/86 Page 7
Reinforcing Steel
nforcing steel shall be tied at all intersections, except that where spacing is less than 1 foot in each
ion, alternate intersections only need be tied. For reinforcing steel cages for other structural
)ers, the steel shall be tied at enough intersections to provide a rigid cage of steel. Mats of wire fabric
Dverlap each other 1 full space as a minimum to maintain a uniform strength and shall be tied at the
and edges.
e prefabricated deformed wire mats are specified or if the Contractor requests, welded wire fabric
oe substituted for a comparable area of steel reinforcing bar plan, subject to the approval of the
eer /Architect.
able tie wire shall be provided in each block, to be used for anchoring to the steel. Except in unusual
and when specifically authorized by the Engineer, the size of the surface to be placed adjacent to
Drms shall not exceed 2% inches square or the equivalent thereof in cases where circular or
igular areas are provided. Blocks shall be cast accurately to the thickness required and the surface to
aced adjacent to the forms shall be a true plane, free of surface imperfections.
orcement shall be supported and tied in such a manner that a sufficiently rigid cage of steel is
Jed. If the cage is not adequately supported to resist settlement or floating upward of the steel,
urning of truss bars or movement in any direction during concrete placement, permission to continue
- ete placement will be withheld until corrective measures are taken. Sufficient measurements shall be
during concrete placement to insure compliance with the above.
oncrete shall be deposited until the Engineer /Architect has reviewed the placement of the reinforcing
and all mortar, mud, dirt, etc, shall be cleaned from the reinforcement, forms, workers' boots and
B Measurement
measurement of quantities of reinforcement furnished and placed will be based on the calculated
ht of the steel actually placed as indicated, with no allowance made for added bar lengths for splices
ested by the Contractor nor for extra steel used when bars larger than those indicated or with a higher
e of steel are substituted with the permission of the Engineer /Architect. Tie wires and supporting
:es will not be included in the calculated weights. The calculated weight of bar reinforcement will be
rmined using the theoretical bar weight set forth in this item.
asurement required by a change in design will be computed as described above for the actual steel
sired to complete the work.
.9 Payment
; item shall be paid for at the unit price bid per pound of "Reinforcing Steel ", which price shall be full
ipensation for fumishing, bending, fabricating, welding and placing reinforcement, for all clips, blocks,
al spacers, ties, chairs, wire or other materials used for fastening reinforcement in place and for all
s, labor, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
ntorcement in items specifically including the reinforcement shall not be paid for directly, but shall be
uded in the unit price bid for the items of construction in which the reinforcing steel is used.
4/17/86 Page 8 Reinforcing Steel
PI
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Payment, when included as a contract pay item, will be made under:
End
Pay Item No. 406: Reinforcing Steel - Per Pound.
406 4/17/86 Page 9 Reinforcing Steel
407.1 Description
ITEM NO. 407
FIBROUS CONCRETE
This item shall govem for the furnishing and placing of concrete reinforced with fibrous mesh in
accordance with these specifications and with details as shown on the plans.
407.2 Materials
(1) Concrete
All concrete shall conform to the requirements of Item 403, "Concrete for Structures ".
Unless otherwise shown on the plans or in the bid item, the concrete shall be Class A concrete.
(2) Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be 100% virgin polypropylene fibrillated fibers specially manufactured for use
as concrete reinforcement and meeting the requirements of ASTM C -1116. The fibrous material
shall not contain reprocessed olefin. Each container of fibrous material shall bear the
manufacturer's name and /or trademark and the net weight of fibrous material in the package.
The specific gravity of the fibrous material shall be 0.91 plus or minus .05. The tensile strength
shall be 80 to 110 ksi. The lengths of the fibrous material shall be '/2, ' /., 11/2 and 2 inches in
length.
Unless otherwise shown on the plans, each cubic yard of concrete shall contain no less than 11/2
pounds of fibrous material. The fibrous material shall be added to the concrete mix at the time the
mix is batched.
407.3 Excavation, Placing of Concrete, Finishing, Curing and Backfill
All excavation, placing of concrete, finishing, curing and backfilling shall be in accordance with the Item
401, "Structural Excavation and Backfill ", and Item 410, "Concrete Structures ".
407.4 Measurement
The quantities of concrete of the various classes which constitute the completed and accepted work in
place will be measured by the cubic yard, each, square foot or linear foot as indicated in the Project
Manual. Measurement will be as follows:
(1) Plan Quantity. For those items measured for plan quantity payment, adequate calculations have
been made. No additional measurements or calculations will be made.
(2) Measured in Place. For those items not measured for Plan Quantity payment, measurement will
be made in place. However, field measured dimensions shall not exceed those indicated on the
plans or as may have been directed by the Engineer in writing.
407 8117192 Page 1 Fibrous Concrete
5 Payment
work performed and materials furnished as prescribed by this item and measured as provided under
surement" will be paid for at the unit price bid for Fibrous Concrete of the class specified, which price
be full compensation furnishing, hauling and mixing all materials; placing, finishing and curing all
rete; and for all forms, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Pay Item No. 407: Fibrous Concrete (Class specified) - Per (Unit Measure).
cable References:
dard Specifications: Item Nos. 401, 403, 410
8/17/92 Page 2 Fibrous Concrete
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
408.1 Description
This item shall govern for the furnishing and placing of all longitudinal, contraction and expansion joint
material in concrete work as herein specified in the various items of these specifications as indicated or as
directed by the Engineer.
408.2 Materials
(1) Preformed Asphalt Board
Preformed asphalt board formed from cane or other suitable fibers of a cellular nature securely
bound together and uniformly impregnated with a suitable asphaltic binder and meeting the
requirements of the Standard Specifications for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete
Paving and Structural Construction, ASTM D 1751.
(2) Preformed Nonbituminous Fiber Material
Preformed nonbituminous fiber material shall meet the requirements of the Standard
Specifications for the Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural
Construction, ASTM D 1751, except that the requirements pertaining to bitumen content, density
and water absorption shall be voided.
(3) Boards
ITEM NO. 408
CONCRETE JOINT MATERIALS
Boards obtained from Redwood timber, of sound heartwood, free from sapwood, knots, clustered
birdseye, checks and splits. Occasional sound or hollow birdseye, when not in clusters, will be
permitted provided the board is free from any other defects that will impair its usefulness as a joint
filler.
(4) Joint Sealer (Concrete Pavement)
This material shall be a one part low modulus silicone especially designed to cure at ambient
temperatures by reacting with moisture in the air and shall have the following properties:
408 4/17/86 Page 1 Concrete Joint Materials
As Supplied
Color
Gray
Flow, MIL- 2 -8802D Sec. 4.8,4
0.2 maximum
Working Time, minutes
10
Tack -Free Time at 77 F= 2F Min. MIL- 2 -8802D
Sec. 4.8.7
60
Cure time, at 77F (25C), days
7 -14
Full Adhesion, days
14-21
As Cured---after 7 days at 77 F (25C) and 40% RH
Elongation, percent minimum
1200
Durometer Hardness, Shore A, points ASTM 2240
15
Joint Movement Capability, percent
+100/ -50
Tensile Strength, maximum elongation, psi
100
Peel Strength, psi
25
The joint sealer shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall be an effective
seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when
exposed to low temperature.
(5) Backer Rod
Backer Rod shall be expanded closed cell polyethylene foam compatible with sealant. No bond or
reaction shall occur between rod and sealant. Backer Rod shall be of sufficient width to be in
compression after placement and shall be used with joint sealer.
Joint Sealing Material
Joint Sealing Material for other than pavement use may be a two- component, synthetic polymer
or cold - pourable, self leveling type meeting the following requirements:
The material shall adhere to the sides of the concrete joint or crack and shall form an effective
seal against infiltration of water and incompressibles. The material shall not crack or break when
exposed to low temperatures. Curing is to be by polymerization and not by evaporation of solvent
or fluxing of harder particles. It shall cure sufficiently at an average temperature of 77 ±3F so as
not to pick up under wheels of traffic in a maximum of 3 hours.
4/17/86 Page 2 Concrete Joint Materials
(6)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Penetration 77F.
150 gm. Cone, 5 sec., max. -cm
0.90
Bond and Extension 75 %, OF, 5 cycles:
Dry Concrete Blocks
Pass
Wet Concrete Blocks
Pass
Steel Blocks (Primed if specified by manufacturer)
Pass
Flow at 200 F
None
Water content % by weight, max.
5.0
Resilience:
Original sample min. % (cured)
50
Oven -aged at 158 F. min. %
50
For Class 1 -a material only
Cold Flow (10 min.)
None
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Performance Requirements:
When tested in accordance with Test Method Tex - 525 -C, the joint sealing material shall meet
the above curing times and the requirements as follows:
It shall be of such consistency that it can be mixed and poured or mixed and extruded into
joints at temperatures above 60 F.
408.3 Construction Methods
The Contractor shall install "Concrete Joint Materials" which will function as a compatible system. Joint
sealer shall not be placed where a bond braker is present.
Asphalt, Redwood board or other materials used shall extend the full depth of the concrete and shall be
perpendicular to the exposed face. All joints shall be shaped to conform to the contour of the finished
section in which they are installed. All material shall be a minimum of '/2 inch thick or as indicated. Wood
materials shall be anchored to the adjacent concrete to permanently hold them in place. Joint sealer shall
be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
The material used for side walk expansion joints shall conform to No. 3 above, unless otherwise indicated.
The material used for curb and gutter expansion joints filler shall conform to any of the above, except when
placed adjacent to concrete pavement, the joint material shall match the pavement joint material.
408 4/17/86 Page 3 Concrete Joint Materials
Measurement and Payment
!ditional compensation will be made for materials, equipment or labor required by this item, but shall
isidered subsidiary to the various items included in the contract.
4/17/86 Page 4 Concrete Joint Materials
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
409.1 Description
This item shall consist of curing concrete pavement, concrete base, pavement, curbs, gutters, retards,
sidewalks, driveways, medians. islands. concrete riprap, cement stabilized riprap, concrete structures and
other concrete as indicated by applying an impervious liquid membrane forming material.
409.2 Material
ITEM NO. 409
MEMBRANE CURING
The liquid forming membrane curing compound shall comply with the "Standard Specification for Liquid
Membrane - forming Compounds for Curing Concrete", ASTM C 309, Type 1 -D clear or translucent, with
fugitive dye or Type 2 white pigmented. The material shall have a minimum flash point of 80 F when tested
by the "Pensky- Martin Closed Tester ", ASTM D 93.
It shall be of such consistency that it can be satisfactorily applied as a fine mist through an atomizing
nozzle by means of approved pressure spraying equipment at atmospheric temperatures above 40 F.
It shall be of such nature that it will not produce permanent discoloration of concrete surfaces nor react
deleteriously with the concrete or its components. Type 1 compound shall contain a fugitive dye that will be
distinctly visible not less than 4 hours nor more than 7 days after application.
Type 2 compound shall not settle out excessively or cake in the container and shall be capable of being
mixed to a uniform consistency by moderate stirring and shall exhibit a daylight reflectance of not less than
60 percent of that of magnesium oxide when tested as indicated.
The compound shall produce a firm, continuous, uniform moisture impermeable film, free from pinholes
and shall adhere satisfactorily to the surfaces of damp concrete. When applied to the damp concrete
surface at the rate of coverage indicated, the compound shall dry to the touch in not more than 4 hours
and shall not be tacky or track off concrete after 12 hours.
It shall adhere to horizontal and vertical surfaces in a tenacious film and shall not run off or show an
appreciable sag, disintegrate, check, peel or crack during the required curing period.
Under traffic, the compound shall not pick up or peel and shall gradually disintegrate from the surface.
The compound shall be delivered to the job only in the manufacturer's original containers, which shall be
clearly labeled with the manufacturer's name, the trade name of the material and a batch number or
symbol with which test samples may be correlated.
The water retention test shall be in accordance with the following:
Percentage Toss shall be defined as the water lost after the application of the curing material was applied.
The permissible percentage moisture loss (at the rate of coverage specified herein) shall not exceed the
following:
409 1213/86 Page 1 Membrane Curing
24 hours after application
72 hours after application
2 percent
4 percent
3 Construction Methods
membrane curing compound shall be applied after the surface finishing has been completed and
adiately after the free surface moisture has disappeared. The surface shall be sealed with a single
, rm coating of the specified type of curing compound applied at the rate of coverage recommended by
nanufacturer and directed by the Engineer, but not less than 1 gallon per 180 square feet of area. The
ractor shall provide satisfactory means and facilities to properly control and check the rate of
cation of the compound.
compounds shall not be applied before the surface has become dry, but shall be applied just after free
lure has disappeared.
compound shall be thoroughly agitated during its use and shall be applied by means of approved
hanical power pressure sprayers for street and bridge applications. The sprayers used to apply the
ibrane to concrete exposed surfaces shall travel at a uniform speed along the forms and be
hanically driven. The equipment shall be of such design that it will insure uniform and even application
■e membrane material. The sprayers shall be equipped with satisfactory atomizing nozzles. On small
;ellaneous items or on intrium bridge deck curing will the Contractor be permitted to use hand - powered
y equipment. For all spraying equipment, the Contractor shall provide facilities to prevent the loss of
compound between the nozzle and the concrete surface during the spraying operations.
)cations where the coating shows discontinuities, pinholes or other defects or if rain falls on the newly
.ed surface before the film has dried sufficiently to resist damage, an additional coat of the compound
I be applied immediately at the same rate of coverage specified herein.
nsure proper coverage, the Engineer shall inspect all treated areas after application of the compound
he period of time designated in the specification for curing, either for membrane curing or for other
hods. Dry areas are identifiable because of the lighter color of dry concrete as compared to damp
Crete. All suspected areas shall be tested by placing a few drops of water on the suspected areas. If
water stands in rounded beads or small pools which can be blown along the surface of the concrete
out wetting the surface, the water impervious film is present. If the water wets the surface of the
Crete as determined by obvious darkening of the surface or by visible soaking into the surface, no
sr- impervious film is present. Should the foregoing test indicate that any area during the curing period
of protected by the required water - impervious film an additional coat or coats of the compound shall be
lied immediately and the rate of application of the membrane compound shall be increased until all
as are uniformly covered by the required water - impervious film.
compounds shall not be applied to a dry surface and if the surface of the concrete has become dry, it
II be thoroughly moistened prior to the application of the membrane by fogging or mist application.
inkling or coarse spraying will not be allowed.
12/3/86 Page 2 Membrane Curing
1
1
1
1
_1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
1
1
1
1
When temperatures are such as to warrant protection against freezing, curing by this method shall be
supplemented with an approved insulating material capable of protecting the concrete for the specified
curing period.
If at any time there is reason to believe that this method of curing is unsatisfactory or is detrimental to the
work, the Contractor, when notified, shall immediately cease the use of this method and shall change to
curing by one of the other methods specified under this contract.
Curing compounds shall be compatible with the adhesion of toppings or overlays where curing has been
applied to the concrete base surface in order to assure adequate bond.
When forms are stripped before the 4 minimum curing days have passed. curing shall continue by an
approved method.
409.4 Measurement and Payment
Membrane curing will not be measured for payment. The work and materials prescribed herein will not be
oaid for directly, but shall be included in the unit price bid for the item of construction in which these
materials are used.
End
09 12/3/86 Page 3 Membrane Curing
12/3/86 Page 4
Membrane Curing
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
411.2 Materials
(1) Masonry Sand
Masonry sand shall conform to ASTM C 144.
(2) White Cement
White cement shall conform to ASTM C 150.
(4) Membrane Curing
Membrane curing shall conform to Item No. 409, "Membrane Curing ".
ITEM NO. 411
SURFACE FINISHES FOR CONCRETE
411.1 Description
This item shall govern for the furnishing of all materials and the application by the methods of construction
indicated for the application of a surface finish to concrete.
(3) Portland Cement
All cement unless otherwise indicated shall be Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150.
Portland cement manufactured in a cement kiln fueled by hazardous waste (30 Texas
Administrative Code, Section 335.1) shall be prohibited. This applies to any other specification
concerning the use of cement materials. Contractor shall maintain a record of source for each
batch. Supplier shall certify that no hazardous waste is used in the fuel mix or raw materials.
(5) Adhesive Grout
This subsection sets forth the requirements for three epoxy adhesives with different viscosity's
designed to bond fresh Portland Cement concrete to existing Portland Cement concrete,
hardened concrete to hardened concrete and steel to fresh or hardened concrete. These
adhesives are as follows:
Type V: Standard (medium viscosity) for applying to horizontal and vertical surfaces. This
material is suitable for surface sealing of fine cracks in concrete.
Type VI: Low viscosity for application with spray equipment to horizontal surfaces.
Type VII: Paste consistency for overhead application and where a high buildup is required.
This material is suitable for surface sealing of cracks in concrete which are veed out prior to
sealing and for grouting of dowel bars where clearance is 1/16 inch or less.
411 5/18/95 Page 1 Surface Finishes for Concrete
(a) Mixing Ratio: The ratio of resin and hardener components to be mixed together to form the
finished adhesive shall be either 1 to 1 or 2 to 1 by volume.
Any specific coloring of resin and /or hardener components desired will be stated by the
Engineer.
Fillers, pigments and thixotropic agents. All fillers, pigments and/or thixotropic agents in either
the epoxy resin or hardener component must be of sufficiently fine particle size and dispersed
so that no appreciable separation or settling will occur during storage.
Any fillers present in the low viscosity version must be of such a nature that they will not
interfere with application by spray equipment or abrade or damage such equipment.
The concrete adhesive shall contain no volatile solvents.
(b) Consistency: The adhesives shall comply with the following:
Thixotropy test shall be performed at both 77 and 120 F. Average thickness of cured
adhesive remaining on test panel, mils minimum.
Type V
30
Type VII
45
Samples of the individual components in sealed containers shall be maintained at 115 + 3 F
for 2 weeks. The mixed adhesive prepared from these samples must still comply with the
minimum thixotropy requirements.
The viscosity of the Type V and Type VI versions must not show an increase of more than 20
percent compared with the viscosity prior to the stability test. The Type VII adhesive must still
be sufficiently fluid to apply by trowel or spatula without difficulty.
5/18/95 Page 2
Surface Finishes for Concrete
gi
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
r1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Type V
Type VI
Type VII
Dsity of mixed adhesive at
1 F, Poises
400 Maximum
150 Maximum
must be sufficiently fluid -
to apply by trowel or
spatula without difficulty
_ife at 77 F, minutes,
rum — 30
Time at 77 F, hours,
imum — 12 (Time required to
n 180 psi)
(a) Mixing Ratio: The ratio of resin and hardener components to be mixed together to form the
finished adhesive shall be either 1 to 1 or 2 to 1 by volume.
Any specific coloring of resin and /or hardener components desired will be stated by the
Engineer.
Fillers, pigments and thixotropic agents. All fillers, pigments and/or thixotropic agents in either
the epoxy resin or hardener component must be of sufficiently fine particle size and dispersed
so that no appreciable separation or settling will occur during storage.
Any fillers present in the low viscosity version must be of such a nature that they will not
interfere with application by spray equipment or abrade or damage such equipment.
The concrete adhesive shall contain no volatile solvents.
(b) Consistency: The adhesives shall comply with the following:
Thixotropy test shall be performed at both 77 and 120 F. Average thickness of cured
adhesive remaining on test panel, mils minimum.
Type V
30
Type VII
45
Samples of the individual components in sealed containers shall be maintained at 115 + 3 F
for 2 weeks. The mixed adhesive prepared from these samples must still comply with the
minimum thixotropy requirements.
The viscosity of the Type V and Type VI versions must not show an increase of more than 20
percent compared with the viscosity prior to the stability test. The Type VII adhesive must still
be sufficiently fluid to apply by trowel or spatula without difficulty.
5/18/95 Page 2
Surface Finishes for Concrete
gi
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
i
1
r1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Property
Requirements
Adhesive Shear Strength, psi, minimum
2200
✓ eter Gain, percent by weight, maximum
0.20
Ability to bond fresh Portland Cement
400
"oncrete to cured Portland Cement concrete, psi,
minimum (7 days cure time)
1.14. to 1.18
Viscosity at 25.0 + 0.1 C, cps
7,000 to 10,000
Weight per epoxy equivalent, gms per gm — mole
175 to 195
Color (Gardner Number), maximum
5
Hydrolyzable chlorine, maximum percent by weight
0.2
Specific gravity, 25/25 degrees
1.14. to 1.18
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(c) Physical Properties of the Cured Adhesive
(6) Synthetic Resin Paint
Type X Epoxy: This is a high solids epoxy coating designed for application by brush or roller. The
materials can also be applied by airless spray by addition of a maximum of 5 percent toluene
solvent at the direction of the Engineer.
Raw Materials
The basic raw materials to be incorporated into this coating are listed below, along with the
specific requirements for each material. The final decision as to the quality of materials shall be
made by the Engineer. After the Engineer has approved the brand names of raw materials
proposed by the Contractor, no substitution will be allowed during the manufacture without prior
approval of the Engineer.
Epoxy Resin
The basic epoxy resin used in the formulation shall be an unmodified liquid resin conforming to
the following chemical and physical requirements:
411 5118195 Page 3
Surface Finishes for Concrete
(a) Viscosity - Test for Kinematic Viscosity (ASTM Designation: D 445).
(b) Weight per Epoxy Equivalent - Test for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins (ASTM Designation:
D 1652).
(c) Color - Test for Color of Transparent Liquids (Gardner Color Scale) (ASTM Designation: D
1544).
(d) Hydrolyzable Chlorine - Test for Hydrolyzable Chlorine Content of Liquid Epoxy Resins
(ASTM Designation D: 1726).
(e) Specific Gravity - Method of Test for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products
(ASTM Designation: D 1475).
Pigment
Titanium Dioxide
The titanium dioxide used in this formulation shall be equivalent to DuPont R -900. This shall
be a pure, chalk- resistant, rutile titanium dioxide meeting the requirements of ASTM D 476,
Type Iti.
Extender
The extender used in this formulation shall be Nyad 400, manufactured by Interpace
Pigments. Specific requirements are as follows:
Particle size distribution.
5/16/95
Page 4
Surface Finishes for Concrete
Test methods to be used in determining these qualities are listed below:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Minimum
Maximum
20 microns, percent by weight
95
; 10 microns, percent by weight
70
80
; 5 microns, percent by weight
40
50
3 microns, percent by weight
30
40
1 microns, percent by weight
14
20
,sorption (rub out, Ibs /100 Ibs)
25 maximum
tness (G.E.)
92.5 minimum
(a) Viscosity - Test for Kinematic Viscosity (ASTM Designation: D 445).
(b) Weight per Epoxy Equivalent - Test for Epoxy Content of Epoxy Resins (ASTM Designation:
D 1652).
(c) Color - Test for Color of Transparent Liquids (Gardner Color Scale) (ASTM Designation: D
1544).
(d) Hydrolyzable Chlorine - Test for Hydrolyzable Chlorine Content of Liquid Epoxy Resins
(ASTM Designation D: 1726).
(e) Specific Gravity - Method of Test for Density of Paint, Varnish, Lacquer and Related Products
(ASTM Designation: D 1475).
Pigment
Titanium Dioxide
The titanium dioxide used in this formulation shall be equivalent to DuPont R -900. This shall
be a pure, chalk- resistant, rutile titanium dioxide meeting the requirements of ASTM D 476,
Type Iti.
Extender
The extender used in this formulation shall be Nyad 400, manufactured by Interpace
Pigments. Specific requirements are as follows:
Particle size distribution.
5/16/95
Page 4
Surface Finishes for Concrete
Test methods to be used in determining these qualities are listed below:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
411.3 Grade of Finish
(1) General
The grade and/or class of finish shall be as described herein and as indicated.
"Grade" of finish designates the areas to which a higher finish is to be applied beyond the
requirements of an Ordinary Surface Finish. Four grades of finish are included herein.
"Class" of finish designates the materials or the process to be used in providing the grade of
finish. Three classes of finish are included herein.
For structures and surfaces not described herein under grade of finish, a class of finish only may
be indicated. Where neither a grade nor class is specified, an Ordinary Surface Finish only will be
required as specified in Item No 410, "Concrete Structures ".
Where the plans specify a grade and class of finish, i.e., Grade II, Class C, only that type of finish
shall be furnished.
Where the plans specify a grade of finish only, i.e., Grade I Finish, any of the classes of finish
may be furnished. Only one class of finish shall be furnished on any individual structure, twin
structures or on structures in close proximity to each other, except as specified for prestressed
concrete members below.
(2) Grade I
The following areas shall receive a Class A, B or C (two rub) Finish, except that prestressed
members shall receive either a Class A or B Finish only.
All concrete surfaces of railing, including the parapet types; exterior vertical faces of slabs, slab
spans, arches and box girders; the outside and bottom surfaces of fascia beams or girders
(including prestressed members); the underside of overhanging slabs to the point of juncture of
the supporting beam; all exposed vertical surfaces of bents and piers and bottom surfaces of bent
caps; all exposed surfaces of tie beams, abutments, bridge wingwalls, culvert headwalls and
wingwalls and retaining walls exposed to view after all backfill and is placed.
Unless otherwise indicated, the underside of the slab of slab spans shall be finished its entire
width.
Unless otherwise indicated, exposed surfaces of pump houses and other miscellaneous concrete
surfaces shall receive a Class A, B or C (one rub) Finish.
(3) Grade I1
All concrete surfaces of railing, including the parapet types, all exposed surfaces of bridge
wingwalls and the exterior vertical faces of slabs and slab spans shall receive a Class A, B or C
(two rub) Finish. All other surfaces described under Grade I Finish shall receive a Class A or B
finish only. The underside of slab spans shall receive an Ordinary Surface Finish only.
411 5/18/95 Page 5 Surface Finishes for Concrete
(4) Grade III
All concrete surfaces of railing, including the parapet types, all exposed surfaces of bridge
wingwalls and the exterior vertical faces of slabs shall receive a Class A, B or C (two rub) Finish.
All other surfaces described under Grade I Finish shall receive an Ordinary Surface Finish.
(5) Grade IV
The top and roadway faces only of all concrete railing, including the parapet types and bridge
wingwalls shall receive a Class A, B or C (one rub) Finish. All other surfaces described under
Grade I shall receive an Ordinary Surface Finish.
.4 Class of Finish
Class of Finish designates either an adhesive grout material, a paint -type material or a rubbing
:ess applied to surfaces specified in "Grade of Finish ", as required above and /or as indicated.
ss otherwise indicated the color shall be concrete gray.
(1) ClassA
This finish shall consist of an adhesive grout textured coating with a minimum 1116 inch thickness,
composed of 1 part white cement, 1 part natural (gray) cement, 2 parts masonry sand, 1 part
(latex) emulsion and enough water to form a viscous slurry of a consistency that may be applied
by spray gun, brush or roller without appreciable running or sagging. The proportions of white and
gray cement may be varied slightly to obtain the desired color.
Gradation of the masonry sand shall be as required to produce a texture satisfactory to the
Engineer.
Prepackaged materials meeting these requirements and acceptable to the Engineer as to color,
texture and appearance will be permitted.
(2) Class B
The finish shall be a paint -type material, consisting of a synthetic resin, containing fibrous as well
as texturing pigments, which when applied by a 1 coat spray application at the rate of 45 + 5
square feet per gallon will yield an acceptable textured coating. Certification by the manufacturer
of the above materials will be required.
(3) Class C
This finish shall consist of a one rub or two rub system, as the case may be, meeting the
requirements set forth below under "Construction Methods ".
5/18/95 Page 6 Surface Finishes for Concrete
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
411.5 Approval of Surface Finishing Materials
The material to be furnished shall meet the requirements of SDHPT Specification D -9 -8110, Structural
Coatings, latest revision.
In addition to the above, the manufacturer shall furnish the following:
(1) At the time of original request for approval of the surface furnishing material, the manufacturer
shalt supply a 1 gallon sample of the material to the Engineer /Architect, if requested.
(2) Each 6 months after approval of the material, the manufacturer shall furnish a notarized
certification indicating that the material originally approved has not been changed or altered in any
way. Any change in formulation of a surface finish shall require retesting prior to use.
The Engineer may request additional information to be submitted such as infrared spectophotometry scan,
solids content, etc., for further identification. A change in formula discovered by any of the tests prescribed
herein or by other means and not reported and retested, may be cause to permanently bar the
manufacturer from furnishing surface finish materials for City work,
The City reserves the right to perform any or all of the tests required by this specification as a check on the
tests reported by the manufacturer. In case of any variance the City tests will govern.
411.6 Construction Methods
Prior to application of any of the finishes required herein, concrete surfaces shall be given an Ordinary
Surface Finish. For Class A and B materials, concrete surfaces shall be clean and free of dirt, grease,
curing compound or any other bond breaking substance. Class A shall be applied on moistened surfaces
but Class B requires a dry surface. The temperature of the atmosphere, concrete and compound shall be
above 50 F for Classes A and B at the time of application. The finished surfaces shall be protected against
rain or freezing for a period of 24 hours after application.
Class A materials shall be applied by spraying, by roller or by brush. Class B materials shall be applied by
spraying only. All applications shall provide an acceptable texture of the proper coverage.
The Class A and B material shall be applied after all preparation work required by Ordinary Surface Finish
has been completed.
The Class C Finish shall be performed with a carborundum stone as follows, after all preparatory work
required by Ordinary Surface Finish has been completed: -
For a two rub system, the first rubbing shall bring the wetted concrete face to a paste and produce
a smooth dense surface without pits, form marks or other irregularities. The use of cement or
grout to form the paste will not be permitted. Striping with a brush and washing after the first
rubbing will not be required. Chamfer lines shall be finished during the second rubbing.
The first rubbing shall be done soon after form removal. Membrane curing, if used, shall be
applied after the first rub is complete. Prior to the second rubbing, any remaining curing
membrane shall be removed from the surface by brushing, buffing or other satisfactory methods.
411 5/18/95 Page 7 Surface Finishes for Concrete
The second rubbing shall be performed when conditioning the structure for final acceptance. The
specified surfaces shall be cleaned of drip marks and discoloration's and given a final rubbing.
The surface shall be striped neatly with a brush and the paste allowed to take a reset, after which
the surfaces shall be washed with clean water leaving them with a neat and uniform appearance
and texture.
For a one rub system, the rubbing requirements shall be the same as for the first rub above,
except chamfer lines shall be finished and the paste spread uniformly, striped with a brush and
allowed to take a reset after which the surfaces shall be washed with clean water leaving them
with a neat and uniform appearance and texture.
7 Special Surfaces Finishes
(1) General
When special surface finishes are required for retaining walls, panels, copings or similar
construction, the Contractor shall prepare sample panels for approval of the finish and the method
of application. Unless otherwise indicated, panel or pattern arrangement and dimensions may be
varied to achieve a more pleasing appearance or to utilize forming material more efficiently when
approved by the Engineer /Architect. Aggregates, materials, variation of panel or pattern
arrangement, dimensions and other features affecting the work shall be approved prior to start of
the work.
(2) Striated Finish
The striated (grooved) pattem shall be as indicated or as approved by the Engineer /Architect.
The finish shall be made by lining the forms with striated sheets of plywood, plastic, fiberglass,
metal or other material acceptable to the Engineer /Architect. The striations on the panels shall be
of a smooth, wide pattern, not sharp or angular.
(3)
A chamfer groove shall be used along all edges of each panel. All ties, bolts or other forming
accessories shall be located along the chamfer grooves or panel edges.
Exposed Aggregate Finish
(a) Structural Concrete
Exposed aggregate panels may be either raised, recessed or as indicated with the sides of
each panel chamfered as directed by the Engineer /Architect.
The aggregate used for this finish shall be approved by the Engineer /Architect. Unless
otherwise indicated, aggregate shall conform to the grading requirements of Grade 2
aggregate except that a minimum of 50 percent shall be retained on the 3 /. inch sieve. Gravel
of predominately rounded particles shall be used, except that when indicated or approved by
the Engineer /Architect in writing, crushed stone may be used. The aggregate shall be large
enough to remain firmly anchored in the face of the final product. The depth shall be % inch
minimum to 1 /2 inch maximum, unless otherwise indicated or directed by the Engineer/
Architect.
5/18/95 Page 8 Surface Finishes for Concrete
1
1
1
1
_1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
End
Ref.: 409
A surface retarder that penetrates the concrete approximately Y. inch shall be applied to the
forms or concrete surface as an aid in achieving the desired finish. Wood forms may require
2 or 3 coatings to compensate for absorption. Form joints shall be taped or caulked to
prevent escape of the retarder during placing operations.
Treated form surfaces shall be protected from sun and rain while exposed to the atmosphere.
In case of high humidity or if rain has dampened the forms prior to placing concrete, a
reapplication of the surface retarder may be required to provide uniform coverage of the
retarder on the forms.
Adjacent areas of fresh concrete not requiring exposed aggregate finish shall be protected
when the retarder is applied.
The finish shall be obtained by sandblasting, bush hammering, water blasting or other
methods, as approved by the Engineer /Architect. Horizontal surfaces may be finished by a
combination of brushing and washing, but only after the concrete has set sufficiently to
prevent loosening of the aggregate.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer /Architect, forms for surface requiring exposed
aggregate finish shall be removed 12 to 15 hours after concrete placement. The exposed
aggregate operation shall be accomplished immediately after form removal. Except for the
time required for obtaining the exposed aggregate finish, curing of all surfaces shall be
maintained for the minimum 4 day curing time. All surfaces shall be either water cured or may
be cured with an approved clean membrane compound. If water curing is used, it shall be
followed by a clear membrane curing compound conforming to Item No. 409, "Membrane
Curing ".
Care shall be taken to ensure proper vibration at all points of concrete placement to prevent
honeycomb or segregation of the materials. Vibration shall be done in such a manner as to
provide adequate penetration of previously placed concrete lifts. Care shall be taken to
prevent contact of the vibrator with the face form.
(b) Sidewalks
When exposed aggregate surfaces are required for sidewalks, driveways and /or medians, the
coarse aggregate shall consist of particles with at least 40 percent crushed faces. Uncrushed
gravel, polished aggregates and clear resilient coatings are not acceptable. Grade 5 coarse
aggregates shall be used for exposed aggregate finishes for sidewalks, driveways and /or
medians.
411.8 Measurement and Payment
No direct measurement or payment wit be made for the work to be done, the equipment or materials to be
furnished under this item, but shall be considered subsidiary to the particular items required by the plans
and the contract.
411 5/18/95 Page 9 Surface Finishes for Concrete
ITEM NO. 432
CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
432.1 Description
This item shall consist of concrete sidewalks composed of Portland Cement concrete, constructed as
herein specified on an approved subgrade, in conformity to the lines, grades and details indicated or as
established by the Engineer.
432.2 Materials
(1) Concrete
Concrete shall be Class A Concrete conforming to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures" or Item
No. 407, "Fibrous Concrete ".
(2) Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall conform to Item No. 406, "Reinforcing Steel" or Item No. 407, "Fibrous
Concrete ".
(3) Expansion Joint Materials
Expansion joint materials shall conform to Item No. 408, "Expansion Joint Materials ".
(4) Membrane Curing Compound
Membrane curing compound shall conform to Item No. 409, "Membrane Curing ".
432.3 Construction Methods
The subgrade shall be excavated and shaped to the lines, grades and cross section as indicated or as
directed by the Engineer and shall be thoroughly compacted. A cushion 2 inches minimum thickness of
crusher screenings, gravel and sand, crushed rock or coarse sand shall be spread, wetted thoroughly,
tamped and leveled. The sand cushion shall be moist at the time the concrete is placed.
If the subgrade is undercut by more than 4 inches or the natural ground is below "top of subgrade" by
more than 4 inches then necessary backfill shall be made with an approved material and compacted with a
mechanical tamper. Hand tamping will not be permitted.
Where the subgrade is rock or gravel, 70 percent of which is rock, the 2 inch cushion need not be used
The Engineer will determine if the subgrade meets the above requirements.
432 8/26/83 Page 1 Concrete Sidewalks
ns shall be of metal or well seasoned wood not less than 2 inches in thickness, of a section
;factory to the Engineer; clean, straight, free from warp and of a depth equal to the thickness of the
hed work. All forms shall be securely staked to tine and grade and maintained in a true position during
depositing of concrete. Before concrete is placed, forms shall be thoroughly oiled with a light form oil.
ansion joint material ° inch thick, shall be provided where the new construction abuts an existing
cture, sidewalk or driveway. Similar expansion material shall be placed around all obstructions
ruding through the sidewalk. The expansion joint material shall be placed vertically and shall extend
full depth of the concrete. Maximum spacing of expansion joints shall be 40 feet as indicated or as
:led by the Engineer. Weakened plane joints shall be spaced at 5 feet on center. Normal dimensions
ie weakened plane joints shall be '/ inch wide and '/. inch deep. All joints shall be 90 degrees to
:erline of walk and shall match any previously placed concrete joints.
iforcement for sidewalks shall consist of polypropylene fibrillated fibers, 1 layer of 6 x 6 - W1.4 x W1.4
fabric or #3 bars, placed not more than 18 inches on center both directions. All reinforcement shall be
ed equidistant from the top and bottom of the concrete. Care shall be exercised to keep all steel in its
)er position during the depositing of concrete. Splices in wire fabric shall overlap sufficiently to allow
pairs of transverse wires to be tied together and no splice of less than 6 inches will be permitted.
ces in the #3 bars shall have a minimum lap of 12 inches.
ere driveways cross sidewalks, additional reinforcing shall be placed in the sidewalk as indicated .
crete shall be placed in the forms and spaded, tamped and thoroughly consolidated until it entirely
=rs the surface and has a monolithic finish. The top surface shall be floated and troweled to a uniform
loth surface; then finished with a broom or wood float to a gritty texture unless otherwise indicated. The
edges and joints shall be rounded with approved tools to a ''/ inch radius. Care will be exercised to
ient loss of dummy joints or rounded edges when applying the brush finish.
icrete sidewalk ramps shall be stamped or formed to produce a finished surface with detectable
nings in accordance with the requirements of the American Disabilities Act, Section 4.7.7. and 4.29.2.
ectable warning shall consist of raised truncated domes with a diameter of nominal 0.9 inch (23 mm), a
1ht of nominal 0.2 inch (5 mm) and a center -to- center spacing of nominal 2.35 inches (60 mm) and
11 contrast visually with adjoining surfaces, either light -on -dark, or dark -on- light. The material used to
side contrast shall be an integral part of the walking surface.
finished concrete, while still plastic, shall be stamped with an impression having the Contractor's
le, month and year The stamp shall be of approved design and impressions shall be made at or near
et intersections and not exceeding 350 feet apart or as directed by the Engineer.
he proper time after finishing, the surface shall be protected by a membrane compound curing agent or
wetting cotton or burlap mats, conforming to Item No. 409, "Membrane Curing ". The sides of the
crete shall be cured in the forms. If the forms are removed during the curing process, the curing shall
continued by the placement of fill against the row concrete or other procedures conforming to Item No.
i, "Concrete Structures ". The top 4 inches of fill shall be clean topsoil conforming to Item No 604,
eding for Erosion Control ".
necessary excavation, filling and grading of the slopes adjacent to the completed concrete sidewalks
be considered incidental work pertaining to this item and will not be paid for directly. The adjacent
avation and grading of the slopes shall be done in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
8/26/83 Page 2 Concrete Sidewalks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
432.4 Measurement
Accepted work performed as prescribed by this item will be measured by the square foot of surface area of
"Concrete Sidewalk ". Accepted work performed as prescribed by "Sidewalk Ramps" will be measured per
each for the type of ramp indicated.
432.5 Payment
The work performed as prescribed by this item will be paid for at the unit price bid per square foot for
"Concrete Sidewalk" or per each for "Concrete Sidewalk Ramps" which price shall be full compensation for
preparing the subgrade; for furnishing and placing all materials, including cushion material, all
reinforcement, joint's, expansion joint materials and for any other materials, manipulations, labor, tools,
equipment, finishing, curing and incidentals necessary to complete the work.
Payment will be made under one of the following:
Pay Item 432 -4: Concrete Sidewalks, 4 Inch - Per Square Foot.
Pay Item 432 -5: Concrete Sidewalks, 5 Inch - Per Square Foot.
Pay Item 432 -6: Concrete Sidewalks, 6 Inch - Per Square Foot.
Pay Item 432 -7: Concrete Sidewalks, 7 Inch - Per Square Foot.
Pay Item 432 -R1: Concrete Sidewalk Ramp, Type 1 - Per Each.
Pay Item 432 -R2: Concrete Sidewalk Ramp, Type 2 - Per Each.
End
Ref: 403, 406, 407, 408, 409, 410, 432, 604
432 8/26/83 Page 3 Concrete Sidewalks
8/26/83 Page 4
Concrete Sidewalks
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
�
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
End
ITEM NO. 601
SALVAGING AND PLACING TOPSOIL
601.1 Description
This item shall consist of removing and salvaging clean, friable topsoil consisting of loam, sandy loam or
clay loam free of roots and rocks larger than 2 inches and debris and placing where indicated.
601.2 Construction Methods
The existing topsoil shall be removed from the area indicated, stockpiled in a windrow along the right of
way or at designated locations or spread over an area that is ready for topsoil application in accordance
with the plans or as directed by the Engineer.
Trash, wood, brush, stumps, rocks over 2 inches in size and other objectionable material encountered
shall be removed and disposed of as directed by the Engineer prior to beginning of work required by this
item. Grass and other herbaceous plant materials may remain. Large clumps shall be broken up.
After the grading has been completed to the required alignment, grades and cross - sections and prior to
the spreading of the salvaged topsoil, any clay or tight soil surfaces shall be scarified by plowing furrows
approximately 4 inches deep along horizontal slope lines at 2 foot vertical intervals. The spreading of the
salvaged topsoil shall be undertaken as soon as the grading has been completed. The topsoil shall be
spread so as to form a cover of uniform thickness indicated. After the topsoil has been placed and shaped,
it shall be sprinkled and rolled to provide a suitable seed bed.
601.3 Measurement and Payment
Salvaging and /or placing topsoil will not be measured for payment, but shall be subsidiary to other items of
work.
601 4/17/86 Page 1 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil
4/17/86 Page 2 Salvaging and Placing Topsoil
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
604.1 Description
This item shall consist of preparing a seed bed to the lines and grades indicated, sowing of seeds,
fertilizing, mulching with straw, asphalt, cellulose fiber, wood fiber and other management practices along
and across such areas as indicated or as directed by the Engineer /Architect/Landscape Architect.
604.2 Materials
(1) Seeds
All seed must meet the requirements of the Texas Seed Law including the labeling requirements
for showing pure live seed (PLS), name and type of seed. Seed furnished shall be of the previous
season's crop and the date of analysis shown on each bag shall be within nine months of the time
of delivery to the project. Each variety of seed shall be furnished and delivered in separate bags
or containers. A sample of each variety of seed shall be furnished for analysis and testing when
directed by the Engineer /Architect. The amount of seed planted per acre shall be of the type
specified below.
(2) Water
ITEM NO. 604
SEEDING FOR EROSION CONTROL
Water shall be clean and free of industrial wastes and other substances harmful to the growth of
grass or the area irrigated.
(3) Top Soil
Top soil shall conform to Item No. 130, "Borrow ".
(4) Fertilizer
Fertilizer shall conform to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer". The fertilizer used shall have an analysis of
15- 15 -15, homogeneous 13 -13 -13 or the analysis indicated.
(5) Straw Mulch
Straw Mulch shall be oat, wheat or rice straw, Prairie Grass, Bermuda Grass, other straw or hay
approved by the Engineer /Architect. The straw or hay shall be free of Johnson Grass or other
noxious weeds and foreign materials. It shall be kept in a dry condition and shall not be molded or
rotted.
(6) Asphalt Emulsion
Asphalt Emulsion shall be SS -1 or CSS -1 asphalt emulsion or as indicated and shall conform to
Item No. 301, "Asphalt, Oils and Emulsions ".
604 5/16/97 Page 1 Seeding for Erosion Control
Cellulose Fiber Mulch (Natural Wood)
Cellulose Fiber Mulch shall be natural cellulose fiber mulch produced from grir whole
wood chips. The mulch shall be designed for use in conventional mechanical r draulic
planting of seed or hydraulic mulching of grass seed, either alone or with fer d other
additives. The mulch shall be such, that when applied, the material shall form a ioisture-
retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder.
Wood Fiber Mulch (Newsprint)
Wood Fiber Mulch shall be produced from ground newsprint with a labelec tent not to
exceed 7 percent. The mulch shall be designed for use in conventional al planting,
hydraulic planting of seed or hydraulic mulching of grass seed, either alone ;rtilizers and
other additives. The mulch shall be such, that when applied, the material shay, )rm a strong,
moisture- retaining mat without the need of an asphalt binder.
: onstruction Methods
Preparing Seed Bed
After the designated areas have been rough graded to the lines, grades and typical sections
indicated or as provided for in other items of this contract and any other soil area disturbed by the
construction, a suitable seed bed shall be prepared. The seed bed shall consist of either 4 inches
of approved topsoil or 4 inches of approved salvaged topsoil cultivated and rolled sufficiently to a
state of good tilth which could prevent the seed from being covered too deep for optimum
germination. The optimum depth for seeding shall be Y. inch. Water shall be applied as required
to prepare the seed bed. Seeding shall be performed in accordance with the requirements
hereinafter described.
Watering
All watering shall comply with City Ordinances.
Broadcast and asphalt mulch seeded areas shall immediately be watered with a minimum of 5
gallons of water per square yard or as needed and in the manner and quantity as directed by the
Engineer /Architect.
Watering applications shall constantly maintain the seed bed in a wet condition favorable for the
growth of grass. Watering can be postponed immediately after a rainfall on the site of'/ inch or
greater, but shall be resumed before the soil dries out. Watering shall continue until the grass is
uniformly 11/2 inches in height and accepted by the Owner.
Hydraulic seeded areas shall be watered commencing after the tackifier has dried with a minimum
of 5 gallons of water per square yard or as needed to keep the seed bed in a wet condition
favorable for the growth of grass. Watering can be postponed immediately after a rainfall on the
site of '/z inch or greater, but shall be resumed before the soil dries out. Watering shall continue
until the grass is uniformly 1'/: inches in height and accepted by the Owner.
5/16/97 Page 2 Seeding for Erosion Control
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Hulled Bermuda Seed
(PLS = 0.83)
Water Soluble
Fertilizer
Fiber Mulch
Soil
Tackifier
Cellulose
Wood
1 Ib.
15 lbs.
45.9 lbs.
1.4 lbs.
57.4 lbs.
1.5 lbs.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(2) Method B - Hydraulic Planting
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Native grass seeded areas shall be watered commencing after the tackifier has dried with a
minimum of 5 gallons of water per square yard or as needed to keep the seed bed in a wet
condition favorable for the growth of grass. Watering can be postponed immediately after a
rainfall on the site of '/2 inch or greater, but shall be resumed before the soil dries out. Watering
shall continue until the grass is uniformly 1'A inches in height and accepted by the Owner.
604.4 Non - Native Seeding
(1) Method A - Broadcast Seeding
The seed or seed mixture in the quantity specified shall be uniformly distributed over (he prepared
seed bed areas indicated or where directed. If the sowing of seed is by hand, rather than by
mechanical methods, the seed shall be sown in two directions at right angles to each other. If
mechanical equipment is used, all varieties of seed, as well as fertilizer, may be distributed at the
same time, provided that each component is uniformly applied at the specified rate. After planting,
the planted area shall be rolled with a corrugated roller of the "Cultipacker" type. All rolling of the
slope areas shall be on the contour.
Seed Mixture and Rate of Application for Broadcast Seeding: From September 15 to March 1,
seeding shall be with a combination of unhulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000
square feet and winter rye at a rate of 7 pounds per 1000 square feet that has a PLS = 0.83.
From March 1 to September 15, seeding shall be with hulled Bermuda Grass at a rate of 2
pounds per 1000 square feet with a PLS = 0.83. Fertilizer shall be applied and shall conform to
Item No. 606, "Fertilizer".
The seed bed shall be prepared as specified above and hydraulic planting equipment, which is
capable of placing all materials in a single operation, shall be used.
March 1 to September 15
Hydraulic planting mixture and minimum rate of application per 1000 square feet:
September 15 to March 1
Add 7 pounds per 1000 square feet of winter rye with a PLS = 0.83 to above mixture.
Fertilizer shall conform to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer ".
604 5116197 Page 3
Seeding for Erosion Control
Mulch
Mulch - Asphalt Mulch
The cultivated area or seed bed shall have a relatively smooth surface without ruts or tracks.
Water shall be applied to the seed bed until a minimum depth of 4 inches is uniformly moistened.
The water shall be applied in such a manner as not to erode the smooth surface.
After the watering, when the surface of the seed bed has become sufficiently dry to permit
planting, the seed mixture and fertilizer application specified above shall then be planted at the
rate required and the application shall be uniform. If the sowing of seed is by hand, rather than
mechanical methods, the seed shall be sown in two directions at right angles to each other. Seed
and fertilizer may be distributed at the same time provided the specified uniform rate of
application for both is obtained. When seed and fertilizer are to be distributed as a water slurry,
the mixture shall be applied to the area to be seeded within 30 minutes after all components are
placed in the equipment. Upon the completion of the sowing of the seed, the application of the
asphalt emulsion shalt follow as rapidly as possible. Immediately prior to the application of the
asphalt emulsion, the planted area shall be watered sufficiently to assure uniform moisture from
the surface to a minimum of 4 inches in depth.
Application of the asphalt emulsion shall be at the rate of approximately 0.3 gallon per square
yard. It shall be applied to the area in such a manner that a complete film is obtained and the
finished surface shall be comparatively smooth.
Asphalt Coated Straw Mulch
Straw mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the
Engineer /Architect at the rate of 2 to TA tons of straw per acre The actual rate of application w!ll
be designated by the Engineer /Architect_ A mulching machine, approved by the Engineer/
Architect, shall be equipped to inject asphalt emulsion material into the straw uniformly as it
leaves the equipment at a rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons of asphalt per square yard of mulched area.
If the straw and asphalt emulsion are placed by hand, the rate of application for asphalt emulsion
shall be approximately 0.15 gallons per square yard.
Shredded Brush Mulch
Small brush or tree limbs, except Juniper, which have been shredded may be used for mulching
Native Grass seeding.
Straw Mulch
Straw mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as designated by the
Engineer /Architect at the rate of 2 to 2Y2 tons of straw per acre. The actual rate of application will
be designated by the Engineer /Architect. Straw may be hand or machine placed and adequately
secured.
Fiber Mulch
Cellulose and wood fiber mulch shall be spread uniformly over the area indicated or as
designated by the Engineer /Architect at the rate of 45 to 80 lbs. per 1000 square feet.
5116/97 Page 4 Seeding for Erosion Control
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
t
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
504.6 Native Grass Seeding
the seed bed shall be prepared as specified above. The seed mixture and the rate of application shall be
is follows:
Alamo Switchgrass 0.1 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Lometa Indiangrass 0.1 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Premier Sideoats grama 0.2 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Green spangletop 0.1 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Buffalo Grass 0.2 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Bermuda Grass 0.2 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Total Seeding Rate 1.0 Ibs /1000 sq. ft.
Species substitution as necessary due to availability shall be approved by the Engineer /Architect. Watering
and fertilizer application shall follow procedures outlined above or as otherwise specified.
Seed shall be applied by broadcast or drill method and shall be distributed evenly over the topsoiled areas.
Aulching shall immediately follow seed application.
504.7 Measurement
Nork and acceptable material for "Seeding for Erosion Control" will be measured by the square yard or by
he acre, complete in place, with a minimum of 95 percent coverage with no bare areas exceeding 16
Square feet and a 1% inch stand of grass. Bare areas shall be reprepared and reseeded as required to
Develop an acceptable stand of grass.
304.8 Payment
The work performed and materials furnished and measured will be paid for at the unit price bid for
Seeding for Erosion Control" of the method specified, "Asphalt Mulch ", "Asphalt Coated Straw Mulch" or
'Shredded Brush Mulch ", as the case may be, which price shall be full compensation for fumishing all
- naterials, including all topsoil, water, seed, tackifier, fertilizer or mulch and for performing all operations
iecessary to complete the work.
411 fertilizer will be measured and paid for conforming to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer ".
604 5/16/97 Page 5 Seeding for Erosion Control
Trent will be made under one of the following:
Pay Item No. 604 -A: Seeding for Erosion Control - Method Mulch - Per Square Yard.
Pay Item No. 604 -8: Seeding for Erosion Control - Method Mulch - Per Acre.
Pay Item No. 604 -M: Mulch, - Per Square Yard.
Pay Item No. 604 -N: Native Grass Seeding - Per Square Yard.
130, 606
5/16197 Page 6 Seeding for Erosion Control
•
1
1
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
USE
TYPE
NEW CONSTRUCTION
POUND PER ACRE
FERTILIZER ANALYSIS
NEW PLANTING
MAINTENANCE
Broadcast Seeding
Any
400
15 -15 -15
15 -10 -5
Hydraulic Planting
Water Soluble
653
15 -15 -15
15 -10 -5
Sodding
Any
300
15 -15 -15
15 -10 -5
Trees
Any
—
16 -8 -0
15 -15 -15
Damaged Trees
Any
—
16 -8 -0
15 -15 -15
Shrubs and Plants
Any
—
16 -8 -0
15 -15 -15
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 606
FERTILIZER
606.1 Description
This item shall consist of providing and distributing fertilizer over such areas as indicated and in
accordance with these specifications.
606.2 Materials
All fertilizer used shall be delivered in bags or containers clearly labeled showing the analysis. The fertilizer
is subject to testing by the State Chemist in accordance with the Texas Fertilizer Law. A pelleted or
granulated fertilizer shall be used with an analysis indicated below. The figures in the analysis represent
the percent of nitrogen, phosphoric acid and potash nutrients, respectively, as determined by the methods
of the Association of Official Agricultural Chemists. Fifty percent or greater of the Nitrogen required shall be
in the form of Nitrate Nitrogen (NO The remaining Nitrogen required may be in the form of Urea Nitrogen
(CO(NH2)2).
In the event it is necessary to substitute a fertilizer of a different analysis, it shall be a pelleted or
granulated fertilizer with a lower concentration. The total amount of nutrients furnished and applied per
acre shall equal or exceed that specified for each nutrient.
606.3 Construction Methods
Pelleted or granulated fertilizer shall be applied uniformly over the area specified to be fertilized and in the
manner directed for the particular item of work. The fertilizer shall be dry and in good physical condition.
Fertilizer that is powdered or caked will be rejected. Distribution of fertilizer for the particular item of work
shall meet the approval of the Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, fertilizer shall be applied uniformly at
the following rate:
606
5/16/97
Page 1
FERTILIZER APPLICATION
Fertilizer
enance fertilizing shall be applied every 6 months after the new sod or grass is placed or until the
:5 accepted by the City.
1 Measurement
and acceptable material for "Fertilizer" will be measured by the ton of 2,000 pounds or by the 100
is as determined by approved scales or guaranteed weight of sacks shown by the manufacturer.
3 Payment
work performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be
dered subsidiary to other items in the contract unless shown in the Bid as a Pay Item, in which case it
e paid for at the unit price bid for "Fertilizer" of the analysis specified, which price shall be full
ensation for furnishing all materials and performing all operations necessary to complete the work.
lent, when specified, will be made under one of the following:
'ay Item No. 606 -A: Fertilizer - Per Ton.
'ay Item No. 606 -B: Fertilizer - Per 100 Pounds.
5/16/97 Page 2 Fertilizer
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
610.2 Materials
(c)
Other approved equivalent restraining material.
ITEM NO. 610
PRESERVATION OF TREES AND OTHER VEGETATION
610.1 Description
This item shall consist of the proper care and treatment of all trees and other vegetation in the vicinity of
any development activity.
(1) Protective Fencing
Protective fencing refers to materials used to protect the root zones of trees. Three basic types of
protective fencing materials shall be used as indicated. Type A and Type B are typical, and shall
be installed where damage potential is high. Type C is to be installed where damage potential is
minimal. Type C fence materials shall be subject to approval by the City Arborist for Site Permit
Projects, or the Engineer /Architect for City administered projects. It shall be replaced by Type A or
Type B fencing if it fails to perform the necessary function.
Type A Chain Link fence (Typical)
Six -foot chain link fencing with tubular steel support poles.
Type B Wood Fence (Typical)
Any planking; 4x4 -inch for every fourth vertical support; 2x4 -inch for intermediate vertical supports
and horizontal stringers.
Type C Other Materials (Limited Application)
The following materials will be permitted as alternates for limited application where tree damage
potential is minimal (as determined by the City Arborist on Site Permit Projects, or the
Engineer /Architect on City administered projects):
(a) Mesh type field fencing with fluorescent surveyor's flagging.
(b) High visibility plastic construction fencing.
Fabric shall be 4 feet in width, made of high density polyethylene resin, extruded and
stretched to provide a highly visible intemational orange, non - fading fence which will remain
flexible from -60 F to 200 F, and be inert to most chemicals and acid. Pattern may vary from
diamond to circular with a minimum weight per foot of 0.4 lbs. /Ft., a 4 foot width minimum
tensile yield strength ( Horiz.) of 2000 psi, ultimate tensile strength of 2680 psi (Horiz.) and a
maximum opening no greater than 2 inches.
All of the above fencing materials shall be supported with -steel pipe, tee posts, U posts or 2" x 4'
timber posts, 51/2 feet in length minimum, spaced no more than 8 feet on centers. Fabric to be
secured to post by bands or wire ties.
610 8/25/95 Page 1 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation
2) Trunk Protection
Any 2 x 4 -inch or 2 x 6 -inch planking; plastic strapping.
3) Tree Dressing
Any asphaltic tree wound paint.
4) Dry Wells
Native stone, railroad ties or equivalent timber with PVC aeration systems in fill areas conforming
to ASTM D -2729, SDR -35.
5) Paving
Permeable segmented pavers in conjunction with PVC pipe aeration system or concrete on gravel
base with cored holes.
6) Fertilizer
Fertilizer shall conform to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer ".
3 Construction Methods
(1) Protective Fencing
All trees and shrubs in the proximity of the construction site shall be carefully checked for injuries
prior to beginning any development activity.
All individual trees, shrubs, and natural areas to be preserved shall be protected during
construction with temporary fencing as indicated.
Protective fences shall be installed prior to the start of any site preparation work (clearing,
grubbing, or grading), and maintained in functioning condition throughout all phases of the
construction project.
Protective fence locations in close proximity to intersecting streets or drives shall adhere to the
site distance criteria found in Section 1 of the Transportation Criteria Manual.
Protective fences shall be constructed at the locations (typically the outer limits of the Critical Root
Zone) and with materials indicated to prevent the following:
(a) Soil compaction in the root zone area resulting from vehicular traffic or storage of equipment
or materials.
(b) Root suffocation from excess fill or sedimentation accumulation (greater than four (4) inches).
(c) Feeder root loss due to minor grade lowering (two (2) to six (6) inches).
(d) Structural and feeder root loss due to major grade lowering (more than six (6) inches) or
trenching.
8/25195 Page 2 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1'
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
(e) Wounds to exposed roots, trunks or limbs by mechanical equipment.
(f) Other activities detrimental to trees such as chemical storage, cement truck cleaning, and
fires.
Exceptions to installing fences at the Critical Root Zone may be permitted in the following cases:
(a) Where trees are close to a proposed building or other construction activity, erect the fence to
allow the minimum necessary work space between the fence and the structure and apply
organic mulch to a depth of four (4) to six (6) inches in the unprotected root zone area;
(b) Where permeable paving is to be installed within a tree's Critical Root Zone, erect the fence
at the outer limits of the permeable paving area prior to any site grading (no grading shall
take place under permeable paving);
(c)
Where there are street -side pedestrian walkways, fences shall be constructed in a manner
which does not obstruct safe passage;
(d) Where there are severe space constraints due to tract size or other special requirements, the
Contractor shall contact the City Arborist on Site Permit projects or the Engineer /Architect for
City Administered projects to discuss alternatives.
Where any of the above exceptions result in a fence being closer than five (5) feet to a tree trunk,
the Contractor shall protect the trunk with strapped -on planking to a height of 8 feet (or to the
limits of lower branching) in addition to the reduced fencing provided.
(2) Repair of Damage
Tree roots scarred by equipment shall be cut cleanly and covered with top soil. When tree roots
are pruned, a comparable portion of selected branches shall be cut from the tree on the opposite
side. Limb pruning shall be made at the branch collar as indicated. All limbs greater than 1 inch in
diameter shall be precut to prevent splitting. All cut limbs shall be treated with an approved tree
dressing. Tools shall be disinfected with alcohol or 5 ppm chlorine solution between trees to
prevent transmitting diseases.
All trees damaged during construction shall receive an application of fertilizer within the drip line
conforming to Item No. 606, "Fertilizer" at the rate of 4 pounds per caliper inch.
(3) Cutting and Filling Around Trees
When an excavation or embankment is placed within the dripline of any tree greater than 8 inches
in diameter, a dry well shall be constructed to protect the tree as indicated, when the cut or fill
exceeds 8 inches.
(4) Paving Around Trees
Where paving is necessary within the dripline of any tree greater than 6 inch diameter, a
permeable pavement and aeration system must be installed as indicated, except for street
construction.
610 8/25/95 Page 3 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation
Tree Removal
Any trees which are indicated for removal or which may interfere with the construction shall be
removed subject to the approval of the Engineer. Trees over 19 inches in diameter, measured 4
%] feet above the existing ground, shall require review by the City Arborist prior to removal in
accordance with the Tree Ordinance. When a tree or shrub is determined to be removed, it shall
be cut to a depth of 12 inches below the surrounding ground line. After removal, soil is to be
placed in the hole to match the existing grade. After cutting the tree into pieces that can be
managed, it will be removed from the site and disposed of. All work shall be conducted in such a
manner as to protect all facilities, improvements and vegetation in the work area.
All damage resulting from tree removal or pruning shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
) Final Cleanup
All temporary tree and shrub preservation measures shall be removed when the construction has
been completed.
Measurement
and shrub trimming, fencing, drains, fertilization, etc., wit not be measured for payment unless
ad as a contract pay item. Dry wells for tree protection will be measured by the units, complete in
conforming to Item No. 623, "Dry Stack Rock Wall ".
Payment
cork and materials prescribed herein will not be paid for directly, except the dry wells, but shall be
tered subsidiary to other items unless payment is included as a contract pay item.
ent will be made under:
ay Item 610AS: Safety Fencing Type A Chain Link fence (Typical) - Per Linear Foot
'ay Item 610AB: Safety Fencing Type B Wood Fence (Typical) - Per Linear Foot
'ay Item 610AC: Safety Fencing Type C Other Materials (Limited Application) - Per Linear Foot
'ay Item No. 610T: Dry Stack Rock Wall (Tree Protection) - Per Each.
8/25/95 Page 4 Preservation of Trees and Other Vegetation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
: 1
1
1
1
1
r
1
1
1
1
1
628.1 Description
This item shall consist of providing and placing temporary filtration dikes along or across such areas as
indicated. This method shall be used during construction only and its purpose shall be to temporarily
control erosion by intercepting and retaining sediment.
628.2 Materials
(1) Hay Bales
ITEM NO. 628
SEDIMENT CONTAINMENT DIKES
"Hay Bales" shall be free of Johnson Grass or other nocuous weeds. The bales shall consist of
either hay or straw in good condition and be securely tied with wire. Stakes for anchoring bales
shall be #4 reinforcing bars, '/2 inch steel pickets or 2 x 2 inch wooden stakes. Hay bales shall be
limited to drainage areas less than'/ acre.
(2) Filter Dike
"Filter Dike" shall be prefabricated from 6x6- D2.9xD2.9 W\NF and 6 oz. nonwoven polyester filter
fabric securely fastened to WWF with galvanized shoat rings. A 12 inch skirt shall be a continuous
extension of the filter fabric on the upstream face. The dike and skirt shall be anchored in place
using 6 inch staples.
The filter fabric shall extend beyond the dike joints to provide a 3 inch overlap. Ends of dike not
lapped with filter fabric shall be plugged with filter fabric.
628.3 Construction Methods
The Contractor may select the material for the dikes, unless otherwise indicated, conforming to the details
' ndicated. Bales shall be placed with ends tightly abutting the adjacent bales. Each bale shall be
embedded in the soil a minimum of 4 inches and a maximum of 6 inches. Bales shall be securely anchored
,n place by a minimum of 2 stakes per bale. The first stake in each bale shall be angled toward the
previously placed bale to force the bales together. Stakes shall be embedded in the soil a minimum of 1 '/2
`eet. Bales shall be replaced every 3 months or more often during wet periods.
= ilters shall be placed with ends tightly abutting the adjacent filter. Each filter and skirt shall be securely
anchored with staples on 4 foot centers as indicated.
Silt accumulation behind the dikes shall be removed when it exceeds 1 foot in depth or when, in the
Dpinion of the Engineer, the structure ceases to function as intended. Dikes shall be inspected by the
Contractor at least monthly and after each rainfall. Dikes shall be repaired or replaced when necessary or
as directed by the Engineer /Architect.
328 4117/86 Page 1 Sediment Containment Dikes
Measurement
Drk performed and the materials fumished as prescribed by this item will be measured by the linear
"Sediment Containment Dikes ", complete in place.
Payment
xk performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid
he unit price bid per linear foot of "Sediment Containment Dikes" indicated, which price shall be full
,nsation for furnishing, hauling and placing all materials including all labor, tools, equipment and
tats needed to complete the work. Included in this item is the repair, replacement of materials,
al and disposal of all silt and debris and the removal of all dikes, silt and debris after completion of
uction or when directed by the Engineer. The dike shall be removed and the site regraded to the final
3. Any depression shall be filled and accumulations of silt shall be spread or removed to a permitted
.al area. After removal of the dike the area shall be graded and seeded conforming to Item No. 604,
ing for Erosion Control ".
.nt will be made under:
Pay Item No. 628: Sediment Containment Dikes - Per Linear Foot.
4/17/86 Page 2 Sediment Containment Dikes
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Physical Properties
Method
Requirements
Fabric Weight: (oz/sy)
TEX -616 -J
4.5 minimum
Water Flow Rate: (gal /sq. fU minute)
TEX -616 -J
40 maximum
Equivalent Opening Size: US Standard
sieve. (number)
CW-02215, US Army Corps of
Engineers,
40 to 100
Mullen Burst Strength: (psi)
ASTM D 3786
300 minimum
Ultraviolet Resistance; Strength retention:
( %)
ASTM D 1682
70 minimum
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
642.1 Description
This item shall consist of providing and placing a filter fabric fence including maintenance of the fence,
removal of accumulated silt and removal of the fence upon completion of the project.
642.2 Materials
(1) Fabric
(a) General: The filter fabric shall be of nonwoven polypropylene, polyethylene or polyamide
thermoplastic fibers with non - ravelling edges. The fabric shall be nonbiodegradable, inert to
most soil chemicals, ultraviolet resistant, unaffected by moisture or other weather conditions,
and permeable to water while retaining sediment. The filter fabric shall be supplied in rolls a
minimum of 36 inches wide.
(b) Physical Requirements: The fabric shall meet the following requirements when sampled and
tested in accordance with the methods indicated.
(2) Posts:
Posts shall be painted or galvanized steel Tee or Y -posts with anchor plates, not less than 5 feet
in length with a minimum weight of 1.3 pounds per foot with a minimum Brinell Hardness of 143.
Hangers shall be adequate to secure fence and fabric to posts. Posts and anchor plates shall
conform to ASTM A 702.
542 5/1/90 Page 1
ITEM NO. 647
SILT FENCE
Silt Fence
3) Wire Fence:
Wire fence shall be welded wire fabric 2x4 -W1. OxW1.0 and shall conform to ITEM NO. 406
REINFORCING STEEL.
s Construction Methods
ilt fence fabric shall be securely attached to the posts and the wire support fence with the bottom 12
s of the filter material buried in a trench a minimum of 6 inches deep and 6 inches wide to prevent
lent from passing under the fence. When the silt fence is constructed on impervious material, a 12
lap of fabric shall be extended upstream from the bottom of the silt fence and weighted to limit
ulate loss. No horizontal joints will be allowed in the filter fabric. Vertical joints shall be overlapped a
ium of 12 inches with the ends sewn or otherwise securely tied.
ilt fence shall be a minimum of 24 inches high. Posts shall be embedded a minimum of 12 inches in
round, placed a maximum of 8 feet apart and set on a slight angle toward the anticipated runoff
e. When directed by the Engineer, posts shall be set at specified intervals to support concentrated
ilt fence shall be repaired, replaced, and /or relocated when necessary or as directed by the Engineer.
nulated silt shall be removed when it reaches a depth of 6 inches.
3 Measurement
vork performed and the materials furnished under this item will be measured by the linear foot of "Silt
e ", complete in place.
5 Payment
vork performed and materials furnished and measured as provided under "Measurement" will be paid
the unit price bid per linear foot of "Silt Fence ". The price shall be full compensation for furnishing,
ig and placing all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to complete the work
ling inspecting, repairing, replacing and relocating the fence, removal of silt and removal and disposal
materials at the completion of construction in and revegetation of disturbed areas.
lent will be made under:
Pay Item No. 642: Silt Fence for Erosion Control - Per Linear Foot,
cable References:
dard Specifications Manual: Item No. 406
dards Manual: Standard Detail No. 642 -1
•onmental Manual: Section 1, Water Quality Management, 1.4.2G Silt Fence
5/1/90 Page 2 Silt Fence
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Sign Designation
Size
OM - 4R
18 inch x 18 inch
W14 - 1
30 inch x 30 inch
1
1
1
1
1
1
I All materials used in barricades, signs and traffic handling shall conform to the following:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
803.1 Description
(1) Signs
803.2 Materials
ITEM NO. 803
BARRICADES, SIGNS AND TRAFFIC HANDLING
This item shall consist of providing, installing, moving, replacing, maintaining, cleaning and removing
temporary or permanent street closure barricades, signs or other devices required to handle the traffic in
conformance with the current edition of the Texas Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Street and
Highways and as indicated or directed by the Engineer. Construction Detours, if required, shall conform to
Item No. 801, "Construction Detours ". Capital Improvement Project signs shall conform to Item No. 802,
"Capital Improvement Project Signs ".
Sign Plates - .080 in thickness alodine finished Federal Specification 6061 - T6 aluminum
Sign Posts - 1.25 ounce /square foot hot dipped galvanized welded steel tubing ASTM A 513, O.D.
2.375 inches, wall thickness .065 inch, 1.60 pounds per foot.
Hardware - Aluminum alloy A 444 sign hardware for clamp castings or stainless steel with
galvanized or electroplated cold rolled steel U bolts, bolts, washers and nuts.
(2) Sign Plate Message and Size
(3) Lumber
Rails shall be new unweathered S4S grade #2 fir or yellow pine, of the size indicated.
Posts, of the size indicated, shall be pressure treated with pentachlorophenol.
(4) Concrete
Concrete shall be Class A Concrete conforming to Item No. 403, "Concrete for Structures ".
303 Rev. 9/30187 Page 1 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
(5)
Retro - Reflective Sheeting
Red and white strips shall conform to Table I CIE Chromaticity Coordinates, ASTM D 523, ASTM
397, SDHPT Test Method Tex - 842 -B, ASTM D- 987 -48 %, Atlas Twin ARC Weathering ASTM E
42 -69, Type E conforming to ASTM D 822 -60X which requires the ASTM E 42 Type E Atlas XW
data; L -23008 dated January 7, 1970.
(6) Paint
Exterior oil base paint, colors as indicated.
.3 Construction Methods
r to commencing construction, suitable "Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling" devices shall be
311ed to protect the workers and the public.
Contractor shall be responsible for installing all markers, signs and barricades conforming to the
ival on Uniform Traffic Control Devices and /or as indicated. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, additional
kers, signs or barricades are needed in the interest of safety, the Contractor will install such as are
,fired or as directed by the Engineer.
Aber shall be painted with 2 coats of paint as indicated.
.4 Maintenance
call be the Contractor's responsibility to maintain, clean, move and replace if necessary, barricades,
s and traffic handling devices during the time required for construction of the project. Permanent
icades shall be constructed as required after the completion of the street by drilling holes to place the
is and concrete foundations. Foundation concrete shall be cured before the rails are attached. When
onger needed all temporary Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling Devices shall be removed and the
3 restored to its original condition or as directed by the Engineer.
.5 Measurement
work performed and the materials furnished by this item as indicated, except for barricades, will not be
asured for payment but will be considered subsidiary to the work or to Item No. 801, "Construction
Ours ".
- icades shall be measured as each complete barricade constructed and placed as indicated. Any
porary barricades furnished shall not be measured for payment and shall be considered subsidiary to
work or to Item No. 801, "Construction Detours ".
Rev. 9/30/87 Page 2 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
803.6 Payment
The work performed and material fumished as prescribed by this item will be paid for at.the unit price bid
for "Barricades" per each complete barricade.
Payment will be made under:
Pay Item No. 803: Barricades - Per Each.
Pay Item No. 803 -L: Barricades - Lump Sum.
End
303 Rev. 9/30/87 Page 3 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
Rev. 9130187 Page 4 Barricades, Signs and Traffic Handling
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PART 1- GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Provide an underground irrigation system as shown and specified. The work
includes:
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
1. Automatic inigation system including piping, fittings, sprinkler heads, and
accessories.
2. Valves, pressure tap, and fittings.
3. Control wire.
4. Permits and Fees: Obtain all permits and pay requited fees to any
governmental agency having jurisdiction over the work. Inspection required
by local ordinances during the course of constriction shall be arranged as
required. On completion of all work, satisfactory evidence shall be furnished
to landscape architect to show that all work has been installed in accordance
with the ordinances and code requirements.
5. Testing.
6. Excavating and badffilling inigation system work
7. Associated exterior plumbing, and accessories to complete the system
8. Pipe sleeves as shown and as required to complete the system.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer's qualifications: Minimum of 5 years experience installing irrigation systems
of comparable size. Contractor shall be a State of Texas licensed and bonded
Irrigator.
B. Materials, equipment, and methods of installation shall comply with the following
codes and standards:
1. City of Round Rock
2. Texas Natural Resources Conservation Commission
3. National Fire Protection Association, (NFPA): National Electrical Code.
4. American Society for Testing and Materials, (ASTM).
2800 616199 Page 1 Irrigation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.4 SUBMITTAL
5. National Sanitation Foundation, (NSF).
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
C. Excavating, backfilling, and compacting operations: Compy with Section
requirements and as specified.
D. Obtain Owner's acceptance of any portion of installed and tested irrigation system
before installing backfill materials.
A. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions for each of the
system components.
B. Furnish the owner with catalogs, manufacturer maintenance manuals and applicable
warranties for all equipment into three (3) copies of bound Operations and
Maintenance Manual.
C. Submit the following material samples:
1. Piping and fittings.
2. Wire connectors.
D. Submit the following equipment samples:
1. Sprinlder heads, 1 of each type, complete with housing.
2. Valves, and valve access boxes.
3. Swing joints, one of each type.
E, Approved equipment samples will be returned to contractor and may be used in the
work
F. Upon irrigation system acceptance, submit written operating and maintenance
instructions. Provide format and contents as directed by the landscape architect
bound into an Operations and Maintenance Manual (See [B] above).
G. Provide irrigation system record "as -buir drawings:
1. Indicate horizontal and vertical locations, referenced to permanent surface
improvements.
2. Identify field changes of dimension and detail and changes made by Change
Order.
2800 615188 Page 2 Irrigation
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver irrigation system components in manufacturers original undamaged and
unopened containers with labels intact and legible.
B. Deliver plastic piping in bundles, packaged to provide adequate protection of pipe
ends, both threaded and plain.
C. Store and handle materials to prevent damage and deterioration. Do not store PVC
pipe in direct sunlight for more than 48 hours.
D. To prevent installation delays, provide secure, locked storage for valves, sprinkler
heads, and similar components that can not be immediately replaced.
E. All controller device units must be delivered and stored in a secure climate controlled
area.
A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the utility surveys.
Verify locations of all known underground and surface utilities by contacting the
appropriate utility companies. Should utilities not shown on the plans be found
during excavations, Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner for instructions as to
further action. Failure to do so will make Contractor liable for any and all damage
thereto arising from is operations subsequent to discovery of such utilities not shown
in pans.
B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns, and other features designated to remain as part
of the final landscape work.
C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by irrigation system work
operations Contractor shall maintain and repair damage to silt fences and other
erosion control devices for the duration of this contract. Cost of repairs at
contractor's expense.
D. Promptly notify the Owner of unexpected sub- surface conditions.
E. The imgation system layout is generally diagrammatic, locations of Aping, sprinler
heads, valves, and other components shall be established as closely as possible per
plans provided. Proposed piping layout within tree drip lines will be reviewed by
landscape architect before installation. Obtain architects approval before installation.
1. Space sprinkler components not to exceed manufacturer recommendation.
2. Minor adjustments in system layout will be permitted to dear existing fixed
obstructions. Final system layout shall be acceptable to the landscape architect.
F. Cutting and patching: (if necessary)
1. Cut through concrete and masonry with core drills. Jackhammers not permitted.
2800 615199 Page 3 Inlgation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
2. Material and finishes for patching shall match existing cut surface materials and
finish. Exercise special care to provide patching at openings in exterior wa lls
watertight.
3. Methods and materials used for cutting and patching shall be acceptable to the
Owner.
1.7 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE
A. Materials and workmanship shall be fully guaranteed for one (1) year after substantial
completion.
B. Backfilling of all excavation shall be guaranteed for the one (1) year guarantee
period. Repair trenches, which have settled.
C. Raise or lower heads to compensate for settling of lawn areas.
D. Provide a one (1) year warranty against material, installation and operation defects.
Repairs, adjustments and replacement of defective irrigation system materials,
including materials, which have been installed on the work during the warranty
period, shall be at Contractor's expense.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SPECIFIED PRODUCT
A. With the purpose of establishing a minimum standard of quality and a minimum
function and operational capability, the irrigation system has been designed
specifically for the use of certain imgation equipment as manufactured by specific
manufacturers, or approved equal.
B. Pipe sizes have been determined by computation of pressure losses in the piping
and the equipment based on the consumption and required operating pressure of the
specified sprinklers.
C. Substitution of sprinklers and/or irrigation equipment of another make cannot be
approved without demonstrating that such substitution will not destroy the quality,
operational requirements, and intent of the designed imgation system.
2.2 SUBSTITUTION OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEM DESIGN
A. If contractor chooses to install alternate equipment he shall submit to landscape
architect for acceptance the following:
1. If a design change is required, detailed drawings shall be submitted with the
request for approval of the substitute.
2800 016188 Page 4 Irrigation
2. Actual samples of each type sprinkler head or equipment proposed as a
substitute.
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
3. Manufacturer's catalog sheets showing full specifications of each
sprinkler /equipment proposed as a substitute, i.e., discharge in GPM, minimum
allowable spacing and radius of coverage, pressure loss through the valve, etc.
4. Detailed pressure loss computations based on the consumption of the proposed
substitute sprinkler or equipment, if the manufacturer's specifications show that
any one of the characteristics noted in section 3 are in variance with the specified
sprinkler of irrigation equipment. These pressure loss calculations must prove
that the proposed substitutions shall perform in accordance with the intent of the
designed irrigation system, either with the same piping and head layout design or
with the change of either.
5. The detailed pressure loss calculations shall indude the following:
a. Design pressure shall not exceed line pressure as indicated on plan. Design
pressure is defined as the maximum pressure required to overcome all
pressure losses and leave a residual pressure at the sprinkler not less than
the manufacturer's specified minimum operating pressure. Excess line
pressure shall be regulated at remote control valves with pressure regulating
device.
b. Pressure Toss calculations must be based on an acceptable Lade of pressure
losses for the type and size pipe to be used.
c. As all pressure loss tables are for straight pipe only, an acceptable allowance
must be made for the additional losses incurred in fittings.
d. Allowance must be made for the pressure drop through all valves based on
the specifications of the manufacturer of each type valve.
6. The decision of approval or disapproval will be based on the comparative ability
of the proposed irrigation equipment to perform fully all purposes and functions of
the mechanics and general design possessed by the specified irrigation
equipment.
7. Approval of equipment shall not relieve the Bidder /Contractor of this
responsibility to demonstrate that the final installed sprinkler system will operate
according to the intent of the originally designed and specified system. Before
final acceptance of the installed system, the Bidder /Contractor may be required
to make one or more of the following tests under the supervision of the
landscape architect
a. Each section of sprinklers may be tested for area of coverage. Test shall be
made by actual measurement of the radius of spray of sprinklers.
b. Each section of sprinlders may be tested for operating pressure at the
sprinkler head. The following method shall be applied for this test:
2800 615/99 Page 5 Irrigation
2.3 MATERIALS
A. General:
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
1. Install a pressure gauge at the base of the sprinkler most distant from the
source of water supply, in terms of length of piping through which the
water must flow to reach the sprinker. This sprinkler must operate
during the test.
2. Install a pressure gauge at the source of water supply
3. With the section of sprinklers operating, throttle the main gate valve until
the pressure gauge at the source of supply indicates the pressure at
which the system was designed. The gauge at the most distant sprinkler
shall not read Tess than the manufacturers specified minimum operating
pressure
c. The sprinkler mains connected to the primary supply line only shall be tested
for a period of twelve (12) to fourteen (14) hours at 100 -Ibs. pressure. If
leaks occur, the joint or joints shall be replaced and the test repeated.
1. Provide only new materials, without flaws or defects and of the highest quality of
their specified Bass and kind.
2. Comply with pipe sizes indicated. No substitution of smaller pipes will be
permitted. Larger sizes may be used subject to acceptance of the Landscape
architect. Remove damaged and defective pipe.
3. Provide pipe continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name or
trademark size schedule and type of pipe, working pressure at 73 F. and
National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.
B. Plastic pipe, fittings, and connections;
1. Polyvinyl chloride pipe: ASTM D2241, rigid, unplasticized PVC, extruded from
virgin parent material. Provide pipe homogenous throughout and free from
visible cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, wrinkles, and dents.
a. 1/2 -inch diameter. SDR 13.5, Gass 315.
b. 3/4 -inch diameter and over. SDR 21, Class 200.
2. PVC pipe fittings: ASTM D2241 schedule 40 PVC molded fittings suitable for
solvent weld, slip joint ring tight seal, or screwed connections. Fittings made of
other materials are not permitted.
a. Size slip fitting socket taper to permit a dry unsoftened pipe end to be
inserted no more than halfway into the socket. Saddle and cross fittings are
not permitted.
2800 618199 Page 6 Irrigation
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
b. All threaded fittings must be Schedule 80 PVC.
c. Use male adapters for plastic to metal connections. Hand tighten male
adapters plus one tum with a strap wrench.
C. Sprinkler heads, pumps, valves, and associated equipment.
1. Refer to drawings for materials. Rain Bird and Irriitrol Irrigation equipment as
specified. Hunter Irrigation has been approved as an altemate manufacturer.
a. Lawn & shrub spray type sprinkler heads: 6" pop-up
b. Remote control valves: Plastic 24 Volt AC, 200 PSI.
c. Valve access box: size as called for on drawings
D. Control System
1. The irrigation system controller is an existing controller with six open sections.
Use existing system and tie new valves to this dodo
E. Lawn Spray Heads
a. Rain Bird Sprinklers shall be of the fixed spray type designed for in -ground
installation. The sprinkler shall be capable of accepting all MPR Series
spray, stream, flood, and micro spray nozzles and male- threaded risers and
extenders. The sprinkler shall operate within a 15 - 30 PSI pressure range.
b. The body and cap of the sprinkler shall be injection molded from ABS, a non-
corrosive, impact- resistant, UV- resistant, heavy -duty plastic material. The
sprinkler shall have a color -coded riser screen filter, stainless steel or plastic,
appropriately sized to prevent entry of foreign material to the nozzle. M
parts shall be removable through the top of the sprinkler case.
c. The sprinkler shall have a single -piece riser/body seal, that flushes only upon
retraction to dear any debris from around the riser, and a stainless steel
spring to ensure positive retraction. The seal shall have no flush during pop -
up to allow the maximum number of sprinklers per station The seal shall be
a single piece injection molded from Alcryn, a synthetic rubber.
d. The sprinkler shall be capable of nozzle alignment via a two-piece ratcheting
riser. The sprinkler shall be available in models with a check valve or
standard models shall be capable of accepting a check valve that will prevent
low head drainage with elevation differences up to T. A 1/2" NPT plug shall
be provided with all side inlet models to plug the unused inlet.
e. A biodegradable debris label shall be factory-installed to eliminate debris
intrusion during installation and line flushing.
2800 815189 Page 7 Irrigation
g
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
RainBird 1800 series. The sprinkler shall be of pop-up design with an overall
body height of at least 6 ", a body diameter of 1-3/8", a cap diameter of 2 ",
and having a pop-up stroke of 6 ".
i. The sprinkler shall by Rain Bird International, Glendora, Califomia, U.S.A.
Heads shall pop up not less than (6) inches with spring retraction Heads
shall accept a fixed art milled brass nozzle, and an adjustable plastic nozzle.
Heads shall have ratcheted flow tube for arc location purposes and shall be
check valve adaptable.
CONSTRUCTION: Body, cover and flow tube shall be high -impact ABS. A
stainless steel spring shall provide retraction force. Outside entry of sand
and dirt shall be prevented with a pressure - activated wiper seal. Check valve
shall open against 9.5 ft/hd. All internal parts shall be removable with access
through a threaded cover. Six and twelve inch pop -ups shall have bottom
and side inlets. Arc location shall be by means of a positive stop ratcheting
device permitting the arc to be located by rotating flow tube white sprinker is
in operation.
k. OPERATION: The nozzles shall either provide adjustable flows and areas of
coverage at rated pressure requirements in both full-circle and part-circle
types or shall be fixed arc in both full and part circle types. All nozzles series
must have matched precipitations to the extent that full and part circle
nozzles can be valved together.
11. Remote Control Valves
a. CONTAMINATION RESISTANT REMOTE CONTROL VALVES shall be
200B Series valves as manufactured by Iritrol, or approved equal, with hand
operated manual internal bleed and flow control. Valve shall be solenoid-
operated, diaphragm, reverse flow globe type with 200 -psi CWP rating,
having IPS threads and be suitable for underground burial without potection.
b. CONSTRUCTION: Valve shall have heavy duty plastic and stainless steel
construction with stainless steel spring and nylon exhaust fitting. Diaphragm
shall be nylon- reinforcement, seat and brass diaphragm plate and shock
cone assembly to fore an integral unit. Valve shall be pacldess, without
sliding seals, and completely serviceable without removing body from
pipeline. Design shall be "normally- dosed ", requiring solenoid to be
energized to open valve, thereby causing automatic closure in event of
power failure. Solenoid actuator shall comply with Class II National Electric
Code and when operating require maximum of 5.5 VA at 24 volts ac.
Solenoid shall be integrally mounted in valve cover and encapsulated in
molded resin to form a corrosion and moisture -proof unit with exposed metal
components of non-corrosive material. Solenoid actuator shall be stainless
steel in a watertight protection capsule. Flow control shall be brass and
2800 6/6/99 Page 8 Irrigation
12. Electric control wire:
2.4 ACCESSORIES
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
stainless steel with O-ring seal and adjustable from outside the valve for.
permanent throttling or compete dosing of valve.
c. OPERATION: Solenoid shall be energized to open the valve hydraulically
and de- energized to dose. Pressure to the hydraulic chamber shall be
supplied intemally through non - metallic, corrosion -free orifices in the
diaphragm with stroke of diaphragm causing a cleansing action of the
orifices. There shall be no screens, filters, or strainers that can "dog up" and
cause the valve to fail in the open position. There shall be no extemal
bleeding or external tubing to fumish actuating pressure.
d. WARRANTY: The valve and solenoid shall have a manufacturer's limited
warranty of not less than ten (2) years.
a. Wring to the "Electrical" control valves from the Toro control shall be type OF
with 4/64" insulation which is Underwriters Laboratory approved for direct
underground burial when used in National Electrical Code Class II Circuit,
(30 Volts AC, or less). Control wire shall be UL -UF 600 Volt, 14 AWG direct
burial cable.
b. A single wire to each solenoid, for the control and a common neutral wire to
all solenoids from the control shall serve as the power supply. For runs
longer than 1000 feet, larger cable may be used provided it conforms to
controller manufacturer's specifications for both material specification and
installation.
c. A valve box shall protect all wire spices. All wire spices shall be shown on
the "as -built drawings. No splices will be allowed on runs of less than 500
feet.
A. Drainage fill: No. 4 to 1/2 -inch washed pea gravel.
B. Fill: Clean soil free of stones larger than 3/4-inch diameter, foreign matter, organic
material, and debris.
1. Provide imported fill material as required to compete the work. Obtain rights and
pay all cn $s for imported materials.
2. Suitable excavated materials removed to accommodate the irrigation system
work may be used as fill material subject to the Landscape architect's review and
acceptance.
C. Low Voltage wire connectors: Direct Burial Splice IGts such as Wade WC014.
D. Valve access boxes: Tapered enclosure of rigid plastic material comprised of fibrous
components chemically inert and unaffected by moisture corrosion and temperature
2800 018199 Page 9 Irrigation
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
changes. Provide lid of same material, black in color. Provide 10 -inch Round. Valve
Box for remote control valves. Provide 10 -inch Valve Box for wire splices.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine final grades and installation conditions. Do not start inigation system work
until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected
B. This contractor to verify existing and proposed locations of all site utilities (i.e., gas,
water, electric, telephone, sanitary and storm sewers, etc.) prior to any trenching and
laying of pipe. In addition, this contractor shall coordinate all irrigation work with that
of all other site work trades and contractors, as applicable.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Lay out and stake the location of each sprinkler head and sprinkler valve. Obtain
Landscape architects acceptance of layout before excavating.
3.3 INSTALLATION
D. Excavating and backfilling:
1. Excavation shall include all materials encountered, except materials that cannot
be excavated by normal mechanical means.
2. Excavate trenches of sufficient depth and width to permit proper handling and
installation of pipe and fittings.
3. If the pulling method is used, the pipe "plow" gall be a vibratory type. Starting
and finishing holes for pipe pulling shall not exceed a 1'-0" by 3'-0" opening.
4. Excavate to depths required to provide 4-inch depth of earth fill or sand bedding
for piping when rock or other unsuitable bearing material is encountered.
5. Fill to match adjacent grade elevations with approved earth fill material. Place
and compact fill in layers not greater than 8-inch depth.
a. Provide approved earth fill or sand to a point 3-inches above the top of pipe.
b. Fill to within 6- inches of final grade with approved excavated or bonowfill
materials free of lumps or rocks larger than 3/4-inches in any dimension.
c. Provide dean topsoil fill free of rocks and debris for top 6- inches of fill.
8. Except as indicated, install irrigation mans with a minimum cover of 12" based
on finished grades. Install irrigation laterals with a minimum cover of 6" inches
based on finished grades.
2800 815199 Page 10 Irrigation
1
1
7. Excavate trenches and install piping and fill during the same working day. Do not
leave open trenches or partially filled trenches open ovemight.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
E. Plastic Pipe
1. Install plastic pipe in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.
Provide for thermal expansion and contraction.
2. Saw cut plastic pipe. Use a square -in sawing vice to insure a square cut.
Remove burrs and shavings at cut ends prior to installation.
3. Make plastic to plastic joints with solvent weld joints or slip seal joints. Use only
solvent recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Install plastic pipe fittings in
accordance with pipe manufacturer's instructions. Contractor shall make
arrangements with pipe manufacturer for all necessary field assistance.
4. Make plastic to metal joints with plastic male adapters.
5. Make solvent weld joints in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Allow joints to set at least 24 hours before pressure is applied to the system.
7. Maintain pipe interiors free of dirt and debris. Close open ends of pipe by
acceptable methods when pipe installation is not in progress.
F. Sprinkler, fittings, valves, and accessories:
1. Install fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, risers, and accessories in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise indicated.
2. Set sprinker heads perpendicular to finished grades, except as otherwise
indicated.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
3. Provide pop-up spray heads with an adjustable swing joint riser assembly as
shown on details.
4. Obtain Landscape architect's review and acceptance of height for proposed
sprinkler heads and valves before installation.
5. Locate sprinkler heads to assure proper coverage of indicated areas. Do not
exceed sprinkler head spacing distances indicated.
6. Install pop-up gear driven sprinklers with an adjustable swing joint riser as shown
on details. The unit shall be of pre - fabricated type utilizing o-ring seals at all
elbow connections. Component parts shall be schedule 80 rated and assembly
as a unit shall be schedule 80.
8. Controller is provided in the location shown on the drawing, with lockable
weatherproof controller housing.
2800 615199 Page 11 Irrigation
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
a. Provide additional rigid conduit from controller down into grade to
accommodate valve wires (if required).
b. This contractor shall pull valve wires, program controller by labeling station
position for zones, and put controller in operation.
9. Install in-ground control valves in a valve access box as indicated.
10. Install valve access boxes on a suitable base of gravel to provide a level
foundation at proper grade and to provide drainage of the access box.
11. Seal threaded connections on pressure side of control valves with Teflon tape or
approved plastic joint type compound.
G. Control wiring
1. Install electric control cable in the mainline piping trenches wherever possible.
Place wire in trench, adjacent to pipe. Install wire with slack to allow for thermal
expansion and contraction. Provide expansion joints at 50-foot intervals by
malting 5-6 tums around a piece of 1/2 -inch pipe. Where necessary to run wire
in a separate trench, provide a minimum cover of 12- inches. When more than
one wire is placed in a trench the wire shall be taped together at intervals of 25
feet.
2. Provide sufficient slack at site connections at remote control valves in control
boxes, and at all wire splices to allow raising the valve bonnet or spice to the
surface without disconnecting the wires when repair is required.
3. Connect remote control valve to one station of a controller only.
4. Make wire connections to remote control electric valves and splices of wire in the
field, using wire connectors and in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations.
H. Sleeves:
1. This contractor is to provide all sleeves for installation of the inigation system.
2. Provide new sleeves as required for all locations where existing sleeves are not
indicated but are required to complete the irrigation system. Install new sleeves
prior to paving installation wherever possible.
3. Install pipe sleeves under existing concrete or asphalt surfaces where cutting is
necessary. Obtain Owner's permission before cutting existing concrete and
asphalt surfaces. Where piping is shown under paved areas which are adjacent
to turf areas, install the piping in the turf areas.
I. Flushing, testing, and adjustment:
2800 615199 Page 12 Imgotlon
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
L. Recommended Installation Instructions for spray heads.
3.4 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide the Owner additional parts as noted.
1. 6 spare sprinkler head(s) of each size and type.
2. 2 spare valves 1" in size.
3. 2 spare valve access boxes of each size.
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
1. In the presence of the Landscape architect, hydrostatically test the mainline
piping system in place, before backfilling. Refer to City of Austin Standard
Specification 510.3(27) for methodology.
2. After sprinlder piping and risers are installed and before sprinkler heads are
installed, open control valves and flush out the system with full head of water.
3. Perform system testing upon completion of each section. Make necessary
repairs and retest repaired sections as required.
4. Adjust sprinklers after installation for proper and adequate distribution of the
water over the coverage pattern. Adjust for the proper arc of coverage.
5. Tighten nozzles on spray type sprinklers after installation. Adjust sprinkler -
adjusting screw on lateral line or circuit as required for proper radius.
Interchange nozzle patterns as directed by the Landscape architect, to give best
are of coverage.
6. Adjust all electric remote control valve pressure regulators and flow control sterns
for system balance and optimum performance.
7. Test and demonstrate the oontroller by operating appropriate day, hour, and
station selection features as required to automatically start and shut down
irrigation cycles to accommodate plant requirements and weather conditions.
1. Mount all spray heads on swing joints.
2. Pop -up and fixed sprays should be placed perpendicular to finished grade for
optimum performance.
3. In areas of high pressure, 30 - 75 psi, a pressure compensating nozzle is to be
used. The use of pressure compensating nozzles ensures that each nozzle is
performing at its optimum pressure of 30 psi. This standardizes performance
along long laterals where elevation differences occur and will prevent fogging
due to high pressures Fixed sprays do not need to be mounted directly next to
sidewalks, buildings, or other harascape features. Placement 1" - 2" away will
allow normal maintenance procedures and still accommodate "at head" watering.
2800 6/5188 Page 13 Irrigation
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIAL
A. Stockpile, haul from site, and legally dispose of waste materials, including unsuitable
excavated materials, rock, and debris.
B. Maintain disposal route dear, clean, and free of debris.
3.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
An inspection of the irrigation system is to be made by the Landscape architect upon request
for Application of Substantial Completion by the Contractor. The irrigation system must be
sufficiently complete so that all plant material can be sustained by the system.
3.7 FINAL COMPLETION
An inspection of the irrigation system will be made by the Landscape architect upon request
for Final Completion by the Contractor. Provide notification of at least ten (10) working days
before requested inspection date.
3.8 CLEANING
ITEM NO. 2800
IRRIGATION
Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove
from site all excess materials, soil, debris, and equipment. Repair damage resulting from
irrigation system installation.
END OF SECTION 02441
2800 615199 Page 14 Irrigation
PART 1- GENERAL
1.01 GENERAL CONDITIONS
The requirements of the "General Conditions of the Contract" and of Division 1, "General
Requirements," shall apply to all work of this Section with the same force and effect as
though repeated in full herein.
1.02 SCOPE OF WORK
Fumish all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to provide all landscape
planting, complete in place, as shown and specified.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
A. Source Quality Control:
1. Submit documentation to Landscape Architect within fifteen (15) days after award of
Contract that all plant material is available and has been purchased, contracted to be
grown, or reserved. Contractor shall be responsible for all material listed on plant list.
Any and all substitutions due to unavailability must be requested in writing prior
commencement of construction. All materials shall be subject to inspection by
Landscape Architect at any time after confirmation of ordering.
2. Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval of Landscape Architect at place of
growth or upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approval shall not impair
the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Plant materials
approved by the Landscape Architect shall be tagged with non - removable tags supplied
by contractor with the project name. Tags shall remain until approval and acceptance of
plant material on site.
3. Inspection and tagging of plant material by the Landscape Architect is for design intent
only and does not constitute the Landscape Architect's approval of the plant materials in
regards to their health and vigor as specified in Section 2. The health and vigor of the
plant material is the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
4. The Contractor shall submit samples and/or specifications of any item being used on site
as listed in section 2 herein.
5. Applicable standards for plant material shall be:
a. American Standard for Nursery Stock, latest edition.
b. American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature, latest edition.
1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Delivery
1. Deliver fertilizer and other packaged materials to site in original unopened containers
bearing manufacturers guaranteed chemical analysis, name, trademark, and
conformance to State Law.
2900 6/5/99 Page 1 landscape
1.05 JOB CONDITIONS
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
2. The Contractor shall fumish Landscape Architect with copies of receipts for all
amendments specified in this Section.
3. Deliver all plants with legible identification labels stating proper botanical names and
sizes indicated on plant list.
4. Protect plant material during delivery to prevent damage to root ball, trunks or branches,
or desiccation of leaves.
5. The Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect seven (7) days in advance of delivery
of all plant materials and shall submit an itemized list of the plants in each delivery.
6. Department of Agriculture certificate shall accompany all grass seed and each delivery of
sod used for solid sod or plugging to certify genetic identity and shall be furnished to
Owner upon presentation of invoice.
B. Storage:
1. Maintain and protect plant material not to be planted within twenty -four (24) hours in a
healthy, vigorous condition.
2. Store plant material in shade and protect from weather. Contractor to provide all water
and protection necessary to keep plant material from freezing or drying.
2. Tree delivery and installation shall be coordinated such that they are completed on the
same day. Should planting be unavoidably delayed, Contractor shall protect rootballs
with a covering material such as sand or mulch, keeping trees In an upright or inclined
manner, or other manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect.
C. Handling:
1. The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading and storing
of plant materials. Plant materials that have been damaged in any way will be discarded
and if installed, shall be replaced with undamaged materials at the Contractors expense.
2. Under no circumstances is plant material to be handled by stem or trunk. All trees are to
be handled with flexible straps secured around rootball.
3. Contractor to protect tree trunks and tree limbs from damage during planting with carpet
or burlap strips.
A. Work continuously on the site with exception of bad weather delays until the project is
completed and as called for in the General Conditions.
B. Schedule: Install trees, shrubs, and liner stock plant material before any lawn grass
installation has commenced. Contractor to coordinate work with all other trades as stated in
General Conditions.
2900 6/5/99 Page 2 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
1.06 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. All plant material installed under the Contract shall be guaranteed to remain alive and in
healthy, vigorous condition for a period of one year after date of written Final Acceptance of
project landscape installation.
B. Replace all plant materials that are dead, dying, unhealthy or unsightly as determined by the
Landscape Architect. Replacements shall be in accordance with the drawings and
specifications and shall be guaranteed as set forth in Section A above. The cost of
replacements is at the Contractor's expense. Material is to be replaced within fifteen (15)
days of written notice by Owner or Landscape Architect.
C. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of plants due to acts of God, theft, fire, acts of
vandalism, or negligence on the part of the Owner, as determined by the Landscape
Architect.
D. Contractor shall remove all staking, guying and wrapping materials at the end of the
guarantee period.
PART 2- PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. General: All materials shall be of standard, approved and first -grade quality and shall be in
prime condition when installed and accepted. Any commercially processed or packaged
material shall be delivered to the site in the original unopened container bearing the
manufacturer's guaranteed analysis. Contractor shall supply Landscape Architect with a
sample of all supplied materials accompanied by analytical data from an approved laboratory
source Illustrating compliance or bearing the manufacturer's guaranteed analysis.
Contractor shall submit a list and manufacturer's product information, including MSDS sheets,
of all chemicals to be used on site to Owner for approval prior to any chemical application.
B. Organic Amendment to be composted mulch as manufactured by 'Living Earth Technology ",
'Back -to -Earth Resources ", or approved equal. Submit sample and analysis for approval.
C. Soil Amendments:
1. Soil sulfur: Agricultural grade sulfur containing a minimum of 99% sulfur (expressed as
elemental).
2. Iron sulfate: 20% Iron (expressed as metallic iron), derived from ferric and ferrous
sulfate, 10% sulfur (expressed as elemental).
3. Gypsum: Agricultural grade product containing 98% minimum calcium sulfate.
3. Pre - Emergent Herbicide: Surflarl or approved equal.
D. Fertilizer. Granular, percentages by weight, (Nitrogen, Phosphoric acid, Potash), mixed by a
commercial fertilizer supplier. Fertilizers for lawns shall be slow release fertilizers.. Submit
sample and analysis for approval.
2900 615199 Page 3 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
H. Tree Paint: Morison Tree Seal, Cabort Tree Paint, or approved equal.
2900 815199
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
E. Import Topsoil: Contractor to supply high quality imported topsoil of loamy character, high in
humus and organic content from local agricultural source. Topsoil to be reasonably free from
clay lumps, coarse sands, stones, roots, and other foreign matter. There shall be no toxic
amounts of acid or alkaline elements. Red or Orange "sandy loam" will not be acceptable.
Submit sample and analysis for approval.
F. Plant Material: Plants shall be in accordance with the Texas State Department of Agriculture's
regulation for nursery inspections, rules and rating. All plants shall have a normal habit of
growth and shall be full, well branched, well proportioned and symmetrical. Plants shall be
sound, healthy, vigorous and free of insect infestations, plant diseases, sunscalds, and fresh
abrasions of the bark, excessive abrasions, or other objectionable disfigurements. Tree
trunks shall be sturdy and have well shaped branching systems and vigorous and fibrous root
systems that are not root or pot- bound. The Landscape Architect reserves the right to
examine the roots of any plant material he determines questionable. Samples to be chosen
randomly and shall be at Contractor's expense.
1. Nursery Grown and Collected Stock: All material shall have been grown under climatic
and soil conditions similar to those in locality of project. Container -grown stock shall be in
vigorous, healthy condition, not root -bound or with root system hardened off, and shall
have grown in container from seedling. Containerized stock shall be in vigorous, healthy
condition, not root -bound or with root system hardened off, and shall have grown in
container for a minimum of 8 months. Use only liner stock plant material that is well -
established in removable containers or formed homogeneous soil sections.
2. All ball and burlap trees shall have firm, natural root balls or sufficient size to encompass
the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery and establishment of the
plant. Cracked or soft or "mushroomed" rootballs will be unacceptable. Ball size shall
conform to the latest edition of the American Standard for Nursery Stock. B &B materials
shall be firmly wrapped with biodegradable burlap.
3. Specimen Stock: When detailed on the Plant List, specimen shall mean exceptionally
fully developed, bushy, and heavily branched plants that have been grown individually in
the nursery. They shall surpass the normal standard for nursery stock in their density and
maturity, and shall foml a symmetrical, tightly knit plant or picturesque characteristic if
indicated.
G. Guying and Staking Materials: Reference plans for tree staking details that apply to portions
of the project.
1. 8' -0' ht. Metal T stakes, dark green in color, approved by Landscape Architect.
Contractor to install per detail on plans.
2. Wire & Cable: 12 gauge mufti- strand galvanized wire will bed used for all trees 3" and
below. 1/8" diameter aircraft cable with cable clamps will be installed with all trees
greater than 3'.
3. Trunk Protection: W diameter rubber hose, length as needed to protect trunk and
branches of tree. Black in color.
Page 4 landscape
J. Mulch:
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
I. Water: Fumished by Owner on site through irrigation system at hose bib locations; all hoses,
transportation across site and other necessary distribution to be provide by Contractor.
1. Tree and Pit Planted shrubs: Mulch shall consist of shredded hardwood bark mixture of
varied lengths (1 " -3 ") such that when installed will form a mat resistant to erosion. Mulch
to be partially decomposed and shall be free of sticks, stones, clay or other foreign
materials. Submit sample and analysis for approval.
K. Sand: Shall be evenly sorted, washed, clean, granite sand.. Submit sample and analysis for
approval.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSPECTION
A. Obtain Owners certifications that rough grades to plus or minus 0.10' have been established
prior to commencing planting operations. Provide for inclusion of all amendments, settling,
etc. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for shaping and fine grading all planting
areas as indicated on plans or as directed by Landscape Architect.
B. Verify location of all utilities before pit excavation and grading. Contractor is responsible for
any damage to utilities and Owners property. Coordinate with all other site contractors.
C. Inspect trees, shrubs and liner stock plant material for injury, insect infestation and trees and
shrubs for improper pruning. Do not begin planting of trees until deficiencies are corrected or
plants replaced.
D. Quantities shown on the plans are for the convenience of the Contractor. In case of
discrepancy between the plant list and the plans, the plans shall govem. The Contractor is
also responsible for determining the quantities needed to complete the installation to the full
extent dimensioned on the drawings.
E. An automatic underground irrigation system is part of the Contract. Contractor may
coordinate the work to allow for the use of the system to irrigate the work in progress. Failure
to adequately coordinate the work shall not relieve the Contractor of the need to provide
water to landscape material up until Final Acceptance of the work.
3.02 PREPARATION
A. Soil Preparation:
1. Grades: Contractor to receive site at approximately finish grade unless otherwise noted
on plan. Minor modifications to grade may be required by Contractor to establish final
grade. Contractor will be responsible for removal of minor rocks and debris.
B. Excavation:
1 Continuous planting beds, depth of excavation:
2900 615199 Page 5
landscape
�1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4" - 8 inches below finish grade
One - gallon shrubs - 12 inches below finish grade
Five - gallon shrubs - 16" below finish grade
2. Tree and shrub pit dimensions:
Depth: 1 1/2 times the rootball (vertical sides)
Width: 1 foot wider than the diameter of the rootball.
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
3. All excess soil excavated from beds to be disposed of in a lawful manner off site unless
by written consent, the Landscape Architect directs the Contractor to supplement lawn
area with approved excavated soil or provides a spoil disposal area on site.
4. Contractor shall fracture and break rock or clay if encountered in excavation and perform
a drainage test. The tree, shrub, or planting pits shall be filled with water and shall drain
completely within a 24 -hour period to be acceptable for planting. Notify Landscape
Architect upon such occurrences.
5, Contractor to scarify bottom and sides of pit to ensure that glazing of clay pit does not
occur. Contractor to be responsible to provide adequate drainage through shrub beds to
prevent waterlogging of plants. Notify Landscape Architect if inadequate drainage in
shrub beds occur.
C. Backfill Mix for planting is to be Gardenville plant mix.
D. Pre-Plant Weed Control:
1. If weeds exist within proposed landscape areas at the beginning of work, spray with a
nonselective systemic contact herbicide, as recommended and applied by an approved
licensed applicator.
2. Clear and remove these existing weeds upon herbicide's completed action by grubbing
off all plant parts at least 1/2" below the surface of the soil.
3.03 PLANT INSTALLATION
A. Layout of Major Plantings: Tree locations and outlines of planting beds shall be marked on
the ground by the Contractor before any plant pits are dug. All such locations shall be
approved by the Landscape Architect. If underground construction or utility line is
encountered in the excavation of planting areas, other location for planting may be selected
by the Landscape Architect.
B. Planting of Trees and Shrubs:
1. Protect all areas from excessive compaction when trucking plants or other material to the
planting site. Protect existing site amenities during landscape operations.
2. Removal of containers:
a. Remove bottom of plant boxes before planting. Remove sides of box without
damage to root ball after positioning plant and partially backfilling.
2900 615199 Page 6 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
b. Remove top 1/3 of burlap from balled and burlap materials after setting plant.
c. Remove all plastic fabrics, containers, ropes and wires from shrubs . and tree
canopies.
3. All plants shall be set upright and plumb in center of hole. Plants or trees in formal
plantings shall be laid out according to dimensions on plans. Plants shall be set to give
best appearance. All plants shall be set slightly above (no more than 2 "), or level with
finished grade upon completion of planting operations. Adjust tree and shrub elevations
should settlement occur.
4. Backfill pits immediately upon setting until hole or trench is one -half full. Hole should
then be filled with water and tamped sufficiently to remove any air pockets.
5. Plant Tablets:
a. After the water has completely drained, planting tablets shall be placed as
indicated below.
Three tablets per 15- gallon container
Four tablets per 24" box or 2" B&B tree
Five tablets per 30" box or 3" B &B tree
b. Planting tablets shall be set with each plant on the top of the root ball while the
plants are still in their containers so the required number of tablets to be used in
each hole can be easily verified by the Landscape Architect.
6. Complete backfrlling operations. Construct a 3" ht. Water retention basin around plant pit
with topsoil. Apply pre - emergent herbicide. Spread minimum 3" deep specified mulch
within tree basins and all pit planted shrubs. Spread minimum 3" deep specified mulch
within all planting beds.
7. Pruning: Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove dead or injured
twigs and branches. Pruning may not be done prior to delivery of plants. Cuts over 3/4"
in diameter shall be painted with specified tree paint.
8. Staking: Staking of all trees shall be completed immediately after planting. All stakes
shall be installed plumb and as indicated in details.
9. Planting of Shrubs (mass), ground covers and annuals:
a. After excavation and scarification of planting bed, Contractor to fill bed with 4"
specified backfrll mix and apply Agricuftural Gypsum at the rate of 50 lbs. /1000 S.F.
complete backfrlling with specified mix to finished grade. Steel edging, if specked,
shall be installed at this time.
b. Plants shall be installed in straight rows and evenly spaced to fill bed, unless
otherwise noted, and at intervals called out in the drawings. Triangular spacing shall
be used unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
2900 6/5/99 Page 7 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
c. After installation of all shrubs, groundcover and annuals, plantings shall be watered
thoroughly. Any settling of plants or finished grade that occurs shall be repaired prior
to installation of mulch. Finished grade of planting beds to be 1/2" below finished
grade of adjacent pavement or curb.
d. After water has drained from planting, but not more than 24 hours later, Contractor to
apply pre - emergent weed control according to manufacturer's specifications.
e. Following pre - emergent weed control applications, Contractor to install specified
mulch to full 2" depth over entire bed area.
3.04 CLEAN-UP
A. After all planting operations have been completed, remove all trash, excess soil, empty plant
containers and rubbish from the property. All scars ruts or other marks in the ground caused
by this work shall be repaired and the ground left in a neat and orderly condition throughout
the site. Contractor shall pick up all trash resulting from this work no less frequently than
each Friday before leaving the site, once a week, and /or the last working day of each week.
All trash shall be removed completely from the site.
B. The Contractor shall leave the site area broom -clean and shall wash down all paved areas
within the Contract area, leaving the premises in a clean condition. All walks shall be left in a
clean and safe condition.
3.05 MAINTENANCE
A. General:
1. Maintain plant materials and lawn areas until final acceptance of the project.
2. Correct defective work as soon as apparent or as directed by Landscape Architect.
3. All debris (including clippings, leaves, etc.) shall be removed from project site.
2. Coordinate with irrigation contractor to ensure functional irrigation system. Notify
Landscape Architect should any conflicts arise. Hand water all areas that do not have
automatic irrigation system until fully established.
8. Trees, Shrubs, Groundcover and Annuals:
1. Maintenance shall include litter removal, watering, pruning, fertilizing, weeding and the
application of appropriate herbicides, insecticides, and fungicides as necessary.
Under no conditions shall shrubs be sheared (unless Contractor obtains written consent of
Owner).
2. Corrective measures - tighten and repair guying and staking work, reset settled plants,
remulch in order to maintain specified depths of mulch.
3.06 ACCEPTANCE
A. The landscape will be reviewed provided all work is in compliance with specifications and
drawings and all plants and lawns are in healthy vigorous condition. Inspection to detemtine
2900 615199 Page 8 landscape
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
substantial completion of planted areas and lawns will be made by Landscape Architect upon
Contractors request.
B. Final Acceptance will be granted when:
1. All trees planted on site that are deemed unacceptable have been replaced and a fresh
layer of mulch has been installed in all mulch beds.
2. All shrubs and groundcovers planted on site that are deemed unacceptable have been
replaced and a fresh layer of mulch has been installed in all bed areas disturbed by
replacements.
4. All items listed on punch lists and field reports have been completed.
3.07 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
1. Refer to General conditions for schedule of meetings, conferences, and inspection
schedule.
3.08 EXPIRATION OF GUARANTEE PERIOD
The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Owner 30 days prior to the expiration of
the guarantee period (see section 1.08). The Contractor shall coordinate a meeting at such
time with the Owner and Landscape Architect to inspect all plant material for its health. All
plant material deemed dead or unhealthy is to be replaced at the contractor's expense and
shall be guaranteed for a time period equal to that of the original guarantee. Contractor shall
remove all staking, guying and wrapping materials at the end of the guarantee period.
2900 6/5199
END OF SECTION 02900
ITEM NO. 2900
LANDSCAPE
Page 9 landscape
WHEREAS, the City of Round Rock has duly advertised for bids for
construction of Mesa Park area improvements as part of Project 1 -1 of
the FY 98 -99 Community Development Action Plan, and
�'
WHEREAS, mem b6 W2 , oNriMe7be57,4 . has submitted the lowest and
best bid, and
p WHEREAS, the City Council wishes to accept the bid of
gfiew UF•AIF44L. TRACIAC ,144. Now Therefore,
BE IT RESOLVED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF ROUND ROCK, TEXAS,
That the Mayor is hereby authorized and directed to execute on
behalf of the City a contract with &WAA g C44,e0ATeACT4@S,.TAr., for
construction of Mesa Park area improvements as part of Project 1 -1 of
the FY 98 -99 Community Development Action Plan.
The City Council hereby finds and declares that written notice of
the date, hour, place and subject of the meeting at which this
Resolution was adopted was posted and that such meeting was open to the
public as required by law at all times during which this Resolution and
the subject matter hereof were discussed, considered and formally acted
upon, all as required by the Open Meetings Act, Chapter 551, Texas
Government Code, as amended, and the Act.
RESOLVED this 24th day of June, 99.
RESOLUTION NO. R 99 06 24 - 10C1
ST: City of Round Rock, Texas
W :AO:AI J
JO A E LAND, City Secretary
K: \wPROCS \Resaxurx \RSaaznci. weu /SC9
JUN -21 -1999 M0N 02:29 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ FAX N0. 5124531734
City of Round Rock
221 East Main Street
Round Rook, Texas 78664
Attn: Mr. Tim Jenkins
Subject: City of Round Rock
Mesa Park Improvements
M.WM No. 702 -05
June 21, 1999
Dear Mr. Jenkins:
Transmitted please find a tabulation of the I3ids received in the City's office on June
21,1999, opened and read aloud. The low bidder on the project is Garcia General
Contractors, Inc. of Austin, Texas in the amount of $160,901.60. Two bids were
received.
We recommend award of the contract to Garcia General Contractors, Inc. in the amount
of their bid.
Sincerely,
MARTINEZ, WRIGHT, & MENDEZ, INC.
Roberto Martinez, P E.
President
P. 01
Recommendation Letter
MARTINEZ, WRIGHT & MENDEZ, INC.
CIVIL & ENVIRCNNICNTAL ENGINCCRING SURVEYING ARCHITECTURC
Twin Town:. 1106 Clayton t.A Sui Le 400W ALISUIL Tom, 78723 512/453076 Pax 512/453-1731 MWM£amwmineaml
JUN -21 -1999 15:26 5124531734 97% P.01
- JUN -21 - 1999 MON 02:30 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ
COMPANY
Bid Tabulation
MESA PARK IMPROVEMENTS
AMOUNT
Name:_T Y a_ c CP - rti
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name;
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Name:
Opened by:�, . � �� : C
Witnessed
Time: P. \ .n
Date: _ I 1 ° I
JUN -21 -1999 15:27
FAX NO. 5124531734 P. U2
co VI c9
5124531734 97% P.02
JUN -21 -1999 M0N 0 :30 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ FAX Na 5124531734
JOB NAME:
JOB LOCATION:
OWNER:
DATE: 6/21/99
Gentlemen:
340 -B 2200
375 -2 120
SUN - 21 - 1999 15:27
PROPOSAL BIDDING SHEET
Mesa Park Improvements
Round Rock, Williamson County, Texas
City of Round Rock, Texas
Pursuant to the foregoing Notice to Bidders and Instructions to Bidders, the d rs gne d bidder he materials,
proposes to do all the work, to furnish all necessary superintendence, labor, machinery, q p
insurance and miscellaneous items, to complete all the work on which he bids as provided by the attached
supplemental specifications, and as shown on the plans for the construction of MESA PARK IMPROVEMENTS
and binds himself on acceptance of this proposal to execute a contract and bond for completing said project within
the time stated, for the following prices, to wit:
BASE BID
Bid Item Description
Rein Ouantity Unit and Written Unit Price
104G 250
S.P. Remove Miscellaneous Concrete
for
a�X dollars
and z.e.re, cents $ 1`4
L.F. HMAC, Flexible Base & two Ribbon
Curbs
for tWr ajNX
dollars
and 1 1r Sit( cents $ 34 • 3te $ 1q.CA
SS F. Concrete Pavers for Sidewalk Rama
(including 4" flexible base)
for
biddoe mst/spec BD -5
Unit
Price
dollars
and 7hV 'r1- \(C'2., cents $ n'8.33
5124531734 97 >:
P, U3
Amount
$ 1,500
$ 1.0,94q .4)0
P.03
• JUN -21 -1999 M0N 02:31 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ
Bid Item Description and Unit
Ttem Ouantitv Unit Written Total Unit Price Price
432 -4 6800 S.F. 4" Concrete Sidewalk
for 1W Q.
dollars
and 7¢,r cents $ 3'
604A 1500 S.Y. Seedine for Erosion Control method B
Fiber_Iulch
for C)r2
and Zero
610 400 L.F. Preservation of Trees and other Veeetation
for 'TWO
dollars
and -t cents $ (9•
628 20 L.F. Sediment Containment Dike
for >ri
and Zero
642 2700 L.F. Silt Fence for Erosion Control
for Di -.2_
and - C•r\,r
biddoc.mst/speo BD -6
. FAX N0. 5124531734 P. U4
dollars
cents $ V C() $ I i 500 '
dollars
cents $ 50' $ 1, t'')GO' t=6
dollars
cents $ I.3CD
m
$
$ 1 i oc•D' cc)
$ 3, 516'
JUN -21 -1999 15:2B 5124531734 97% P.04
. JUN -°21 -1999 MON 02:31 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ
Bid Item Description and Unit
Item Ouantity Unit Written Total Unit Price Price
803 1 L_S. Barricades, Signs and Traffic I- Candling
for Fi ! Q s c1
2800 1 L.S. Irrigation (Complete in place)
2900 1 I. Landscaoe (Complete in place)
2995 1 L.S.. Playground. Equipment & Surfacing
TOTAL BASE BID (Items 1 thru 12 ):
for - t'evn. 'Cho�SOnr.C�
STATEMENT OF SEPARATE CHARGES:
biddoc.mst/spec
JUN -21 -1999 15:28
FAX N0. 5124531734 N. U5
dollars
and 7,2r0 cents $ 5,0 $ 5 000'
for 4L eel `Chop sco-A
dollars
and crn cents $15,C $ 5 ,0D0
for - ■4k2er - 'fhoJsC+v\D‘
dollars
and zero cents $ 15 $ 15 01JCO
dollars
and zero cents $ 10,06c) S 10, MO' _
Materials:
All Other Charges:
Total:
RD -7
$ Q01•L
Amount
$ - 10 066
S g01•l�
$ Ito , COI Lac
5124531734 97% P.05
JUN-21 -1999 MON 02:32 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ
If this proposal is accepted, the undersigned agrees to execute the contract and provide necessary bonds and
insurance certification as per the Instructions to Bidders and commence work within ten (10) days after written
Notice to Proceed. The undersigned further agrees to complete the work in full within ninety (90) calendar days
after the date of the written Notice -to- Proceed.
The undersigned certifies that the bid prices contained in the proposal have been carefully checked and are submitted
as correct and final. The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and may waive any informalities.
espectfully Submitted,
Si sture
Joa,A Qarc\o■
Print Name
Pe sid,evv\t-
'Title for
C GfC1A�4V�e -o\ esw\N- rackor5 -∎c
Name of Firm
o laA
Dat
biddoc.mst /spec BD -8
JUN-21-1999 15:29
FRX NO. 5124531734 F, U6
?R15 9-1vw;‘e. *
Address
t -v-v
Telephone
Secretary, if Contractor is a
Corporation
5124531734 97% P.06
JUN =21 -1999 MON 02:32 PM MARTINEZ WRIGHT MENDEZ
Concrete Sidewalks
B10 OR PROPOSAL BOND
,FAH NO, 5124531734
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, coat wa Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
P. 07
as PRINCIPAL, (hereinafter called the Principal), and Gulf Insurance Company
, a corporation duly organized under thelaws of Missouri and authorized to transact
a general surety business in the State of Texas, as SURETY, (hereinafter called the Surety), are held firmly bound unto:
City of Round Rock Public Works Department
as OBLIGEE, (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the sum equal to 5 % of the accompanying bid of '. Principal, not,
however, in excess of Ten Thousand and no/100 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** dollars,
Is 10,000.00 1, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, the said Principal sal the said Surety,
bind Ourselves, :ur heirs. executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly lsy these presents.
THE DONDITII'•NS OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH,That, whereas the Principal has submitted or is abou: to submit to the
Obligee a proor al or bid, dated on or about the date mentioned below, for; (t) the performance of the di rignated work, or
(21 :he furnish), ; of the specified goods, supplies or products, to -wit:
NOW THEREF ]RE, if the Principal shall not legally withdraw said bid within or at the times permitted therefor, but shall
duly make and inter into a written contract with the Obligee, in accordance with the terms of said proposal or bid, or any
amendment thereof acceptable to the Principal, within the time permitted therefor after such contract forms are presented to
the Principal fo execution. should the Obligee award the Principal the said work or contract, or any part t .nreof; and if the
Principal shall viva bond Or bonds for the faithful performance thereof, and/or for payment for labor and materials going
thereinto, as in -,e specifications or contracts provided: or if the Principal shall, in case of failure so to do, I ly to the Obligee
the damages wl.ich the Obligee shall have actually suffered by reason of such failure. not exceeding the :anal sum Of :hie
bond, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherw';e co be and remain in full force and virtue,
PROVIDED, H::WEVER, that no action shall tie, or claim be enforced hereunder, unless the award on tht oasis of said bid
shall have been made within thirty (301 days after the formal opening of said bid, or within the time sped; I d within the bid
Provisions, whichever time shall be greater, and unless the Obligee hereunder shall give notice to Surety a' aid award at the
time of notifica:,en 10 the Principal: and unless legal action to enforce any claim hereunder shall have :eon commenced
within six (6) months from the date of the formal opening of Bald bid.
PROVIDED, always, that this Band shall not be valid and binding upon the Surety unless accompanied by a Certified Copy
of a Power of Attorney authorizing the undersigned Attorney-in-Fact to execute such a bond, the Serial Number upon which
Copy of Power of Attorney shall correspond with the Bond Number set out above.
Signed, sealed, and dated this 21st day of June ,d 99
Garcia General Contractors, Inc.
JUN -21 -1999 15:29
8Y'
BY
5124531734
Gulf Insurance Company
Kenneth L. Meyer
97%
Principal
P. 07
DATE: June 21, 1999
SUBJECT: City Council Meeting — June 24, 1999
ITEM: 10.C.1. Consider a resolution authorizing the Mayor to execute a contract
for construction of Mesa Park area improvements as part of Project
1 -1 of the 1998 -99 Community Development Action Plan. Staff
Resource Person: Joe Vining, Planning Director.
Staff recommends awarding this contract to Garcia General Contractors, Incorporated of Austin,
Texas in the amount of $160,901.60. The project consists of sidewalk improvements on sections
of Mesa Park Drive and Georgetown Street; and, a jogging/bicycle trail, additional landscaping,
and playground improvements in Mesa Park. Construction phase will begin in 3 -4 weeks.